2017 Alfa Romeo 4C Spider Owner's Manual...Ce guide a été adapté à l’intention de nos clients...

2 0 1 7

20

17

4C

SP

IDE

R

SPIDERSecond Edition Rev 1

Printed in U.S.A.

©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark ofFCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission.

17SPDR-126-AB OW N E R ’ S M A N U A L

Ce guide a été adapté à l’intention de nos clients canadiensd’expression française. Pour cette raison, il peut différer quelquepeu de la version anglaise du guide qui aurait pu accompagnervotre véhicule neuf. Il est aussi possible que votre véhicule necomporte pas certains des équipements décrits dans ce guide.

Le présent guide illustré et décrit les fonctions et les équipe-ments de série ou en option de ce véhicule. Ce guide peut aussicomprendre des descriptions de fonctions ou d’équipementsqui ne sont plus livrables ou qui n’ont pas été commandés pource véhicule. Veuillez ne pas tenir compte des fonctions etéquipements décrits ci-après s’ils n’équipent pas le véhicule.

En ce qui concerne les véhicules vendus au Canada, le nom deFCA US LLC sera considéré comme ayant été supprimé etremplacé par celui de FCA Canada Inc.

Veuillez laisser le Guide de l’automobiliste avec le véhicule aumoment où il sera vendu. Le prochain propriétaire voudrasûrement prendre connaissance des renseignements contenusdans ce guide.

FCA US LLC se réserve le droit d’apporter des modifications à laconception et aux caractéristiques techniques de ses véhicules oude les améliorer sans, pour autant, contracter d’obligation en cequi concerne les véhicules vendus antérieurement.

L’ALCOOL AU VOLANTLa conduite en état d’ébriété est l’une des principales causesd’accidents de la route.

Même si la teneur de votre sang en alcool est nettementinférieure à la limite imposée par la loi, vos capacités peuventêtre sérieusement réduites. C’est pourquoi vous ne devez pasprendre le volant si vous avez bu. Faites-vous accompagner parune personne qui a été désignée comme conducteur nonbuveur, prenez un taxi, appelez un ami ou servez-vous destransports en commun.

MISE EN GARDE !

Conduire après avoir consommé de l’alcool peut être lacause d’une collision. Votre perception est moins pré-cise, vos réflexes sont plus lents et votre jugement estdiminué lorsque vous consommez de l’alcool. Neconduisez jamais après avoir consommé de l’alcool.

© Droit réservés 2016 de FCA US LLC

TABLE OF CONTENTSSECTION PAGE

1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS� INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

� HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

� WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . .5

� VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . .5

� VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . .6

1

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Beassured that it represents precision workmanship, dis-tinctive styling, and high quality.

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with theassistance of service and engineering specialists toacquaint you with the operation and maintenance ofyour vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Informa-tion, and various customer-oriented documents. Pleasetake the time to read these publications carefully. Fol-lowing the instructions and recommendations in thismanual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation ofyour vehicle.

The enclosed Warranty Information lists the servicesthat FCA US LLC offers to its customers:

• The Warranty with terms and conditions for main-taining its validity

• The range of additional services available to FCA USLLC customers

NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, itshould be stored in the vehicle for convenient refer-encing and remain with the vehicle when sold.

When it comes to service, remember that your autho-rized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, andcares about your satisfaction.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Consult the Table of Contents to determine whichsection contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on theitems of equipment ordered, certain descriptions andillustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.

The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manualcontains a complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of thesymbols that may be used on your vehicle or through-out this Owner’s Manual:

4 INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-erating procedures that could result in a collision, bodilyinjury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS againstprocedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. Ifyou do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you maymiss important information. Observe all Warnings andCautions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found onthe left front corner of the instrument panel, visiblethrough the windshield. This number also appearsengraved on an Aluminum plate glued and riveted onthe floor crossmember under the passenger seat.

1

INTRODUCTION 5

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehiclecould seriously affect its roadworthiness and safetyand may lead to a collision resulting in seriousinjury or death.

Vehicle Identification Number

6 INTRODUCTION

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS� A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

▫ Locking Doors With A Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

� SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

� VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IFEQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

� ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

� REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IFEQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

▫ Key Fob Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .16

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

� DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

▫ Central Door Locking/Unlocking . . . . . . . . . .18

▫ Locking/Unlocking Doors From The Inside . .19

▫ Emergency Door Locking Device . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ Door Opening/Closing Mechanism Reset . . . .20

� WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

� DECKLID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

� OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . .24

▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . . .24

▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

2

▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . .34

▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

� ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .55

� SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside TheVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should MakeOutside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

8 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

The key fob contains the key fob with an integratedmechanical key. To use the mechanical key, simply pushthe key release button.

Lock or unlock the door with a push of the button.

Ignition Key Removal

1. Push the brake pedal and place the transmission intofirst (1) or reverse (R) gear by selecting/pushing thebuttons on the console.

2. Rotate the key to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) positionand engage the handbrake and release brake pedal.

3. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylin-der.

Key Fob

1 — Vehicle Key2 — Push To Open/Close Vehicle Key3 — Unlock Button4 — Lock Button

Transmission Gear Selector

2

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9

WARNING!

• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the auto-matic transmission into PARK or the manualtransmission into REVERSE, apply the parkingbrake, turn the engine OFF, remove the key fobfrom the ignition and lock your vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle.• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child orothers could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-dren should be warned not to touch the parkingbrake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selec-tor.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, orin a location accessible to children. A child couldoperate power windows, other controls, or movethe vehicle.

• Do not leave children or animals inside parkedvehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-upmay cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always re-move the key from the ignition and lock all thedoors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Ignition Switch Positions

1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK)2 — MAR (ON/RUN)3 — AVV (START)


Locking Doors With A Key

You can insert the key with either side up. To lock thedoor, turn the key to the left. To unlock the door, turnthe key to the right. Refer to “Body Lubrication” in“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for maintenance informa-tion.

Key-In-Ignition Reminder

Opening the driver’s door when the key is in theignition and the ignition switch position is in the STOP(OFF/LOCK) position, sounds a signal to remove thekey.

SENTRY KEY

The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. Thesystem does not need to be armed or activated. Opera-tion is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle islocked or unlocked.

The system uses ignition keys which have an embeddedelectronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorizedvehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operatethe vehicle.

NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is alsoconsidered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit theignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.

If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turnedto the MAR/ON/RUN position, it indicates that thereis a problem with the electronics.

CAUTION!

• Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicleand lock all doors when leaving the vehicleunattended.

• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not com-patible with some aftermarket remote startingsystems. Use of these systems may result invehicle starting problems and loss of securityprotection.

All of the keys provided with your new vehicle havebeen programmed to the vehicle electronics.

2


Replacement Keys

NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to thevehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Oncea Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, itcannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key ImmobilizerSystem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to anauthorized dealer.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radiofrequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules andwith Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IFEQUIPPED

The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors anddecklid for unauthorized entry and the ignition forunauthorized operation. If something triggers thealarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will prevent thevehicle from starting. It will also emit an acoustic signaland flash the park lights, and taillights.

Operation

The alarm activates in the following cases:

1. Wrongful opening of one of the doors or the decklid(perimeter protection);

2. Wrongful operation of the ignition switch (keyturned to MAR ON/RUN);

3. Cutting of the battery leads;

4. Anomalous lifting/tilting of the car.

Operation of the alarm is indicated by an acoustic andvisual signal (flashing of the direction indicators forseveral seconds). The alarm activation modes may varyaccording to the market. There is a maximum numberof acoustic/visual cycles. When this is reached thesystem returns to normal operation.


NOTE:

• The engine locking function is guaranteed by the AlfaRomeo CODE, which is automatically activatedwhen the key is extracted from the ignition switch.

• The alarm is adapted to meet requirements in variouscountries.

To Arm The System

With the doors and decklid closed and the ignition keyeither turned to STOP (OFF/LOCK) or removed, pointthe key towards the vehicle then push and release thelock button.

The system emits a visual signal and activates doorlocking.

A self-diagnosis stage lasting approximately 30 secondsprecedes the activation of the alarm. During the self-diagnosis, the vehicle security light flashes in the instru-ment panel at a frequency of about one flash per second.

After the self-diagnosis stage, the vehicle security lightflashes at a lower frequency (approximately one flashevery three seconds).

If, after the alarm is switched on, a second visual signalemit via the vehicle security light in the instrumentpanel, wait about four seconds and switch off the alarmby pushing the lock button, check that the doors anddecklid are closed correctly and then reactivate thesystem by pushing the unlock button.

If the alarm emits a visual signal even when the doorsand decklid are closed correctly, a system malfunctionhas occurred: in this case, contact a authorized vehicleDealership.

To Disarm The System

Deactivation

Push the unlock button.

The following operations are performed:

• Two brief flashes of the direction indicators.

• Unlocking of the doors.

2


NOTE:

• If the central door locking system is released usingthe metal insert of the key, the alarm is not disabled.

• In the event of accidental activation of the alarm, orin any case to interrupt the visual signal cycle whenactivated, it is possible to push the unlock button orturn the ignition key to MAR (ON/RUN) for at leastfive seconds, after which the system will deactivate.

Disarming

To completely disable the alarm (e.g. during a lengthyperiod of vehicle inactivity), lock the vehicle by turningthe metal insert of the key in the door lock.

NOTE: If the batteries of the key fob run out or there isa fault in the system, the alarm can be switched off byinserting the key in the ignition switch and turning it toMAR (ON/RUN).

ILLUMINATED ENTRY

The interior lights will turn on whenever a door isopened and the dimmer switch is not in the defeatposition.

The interior lights will turn on, remain on for approxi-mately 30 seconds, and then fade to off if a door isopened using the outside door handle and then closedor a door is unlocked using the vehicles key.

The interior lights will turn on and remain on for aboutfour seconds and then fade to off if a door is openedusing the inside door handle.

NOTE: The interior light is located in the headliner inbetween the sun visors. The interior light can be set tothree different positions (Off/Left Position, Center Po-sition, On/Right Position).

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IFEQUIPPED

This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors fromdistances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using ahand-held key fob. The key fob does not need to bepointed at the vehicle to activate the system.


NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blockedwith metal objects.

To Unlock The Doors

Push and release the unlock button on the key fob tounlock the doors. The park lights and turn signal lightswill flash to acknowledge the signal and the illuminatedentry system will turn on.

NOTE: The door unlock indicator will illuminate in theinstrument panel when one or both doors are unlocked.

To Lock The Doors

Push and release the lock button on the key fob will lockthe doors, switching off the internal roof light andsingle flashing of direction indicators.

If one or more doors are open, the doors will not belocked. This is indicated by a rapid flashing of thedirection indicators. The doors will be locked if thedecklid is open however.

Key Fob

1 — Vehicle Key2 — Push To Open/Close Vehicle Key

2


When a speed of more than 12 MPH (20 km/h) isreached, the doors will be locked automatically if theAutoclose function was selected. Refer to “InstrumentCluster Display” in “Understanding Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.

When the doors are locked from outside the vehicle(using the key fob), the door lock indicator will illumi-nate for a few seconds and then start flashing (deterrentfunction).

Key Fob Battery Replacement

NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.

Replace the Key Fob battery with the following proce-dure:

1. Push release button and move the mechanical key toopening position.

2. Turn screw to unlock using a fine bit screwdriver.

Door LED Lock Indicator

Battery Replacement Procedure

1 — Mechanical Key2 — Release Button3 — Battery4 — Battery Compartment5 — Screw


3. Remove battery compartment.

4. Replace battery respecting the polarity.

5. Reinsert battery compartment in the key and secureit by turning screw to lock.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all RadioFrequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules andwith Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Key Fob Screw Location Key Fob Screw Location

2



DOOR LOCKS

Central Door Locking/Unlocking

Locking Doors From The Outside

With the doors closed, push the lock button on the keyfob or turn the metal insert (located inside the key fob)in the door lock.

The door lock LED indicator button will illuminate toindicate that the doors have locked.

NOTE: Door locking is carried out with all doors shut.

Unlocking Doors From The Outside

Push the unlock button on the key fob or turn the metalinsert (located inside the key fob) in the driver side doorlock.

WARNING!

• For personal security and safety in the event of acollision, lock the vehicle doors before you driveas well as when you park and leave the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or withaccess to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing childrento be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for anumber of reasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Children should bewarned not to touch the parking brake, brakepedal or the transmission gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, orin a location accessible to children. A child couldoperate power windows, other controls, or movethe vehicle.

Door Lock LED Indicator


Locking/Unlocking Doors From The Inside

Push the lock LED indicator button . The button has anLED that indicates whether the doors are locked orunlocked.

Pushing the lock LED indicator button again centrallyunlocks all doors and switches off the LED.

Pushing the lock LED indicator button again centrallylocks all the doors. The doors will be locked only if allthe doors are properly shut.

Once the doors have been locked using the remotecontrol or the key, it will no longer be possible to unlockthem by pushing the lock LED indicator button.

NOTE: In the absence of electrical power supply (blownfuse, battery disconnected, etc.), it is still possible tolock the doors manually.

Emergency Door Locking Device

Passenger Side Door

The passenger side door has a device to lock it whenthere is no current.

To lock it, place the metal insert of the ignition key inthe child protection lock and turn it clockwise.

To restore the starting condition of the door locks (onlyif battery charge restored), proceed as follows:

• Push the unlock button on the key fob;

• Push the door locking/unlocking LED indicator but-ton on the dashboard; or

• Introduce the metal insert of the ignition key in thefront door pawl; or

• Pull the internal door handle.

Emergency Door Lock Function

1 — Child Protection Lock

2


Door Opening/Closing Mechanism Reset

If the battery is disconnected or the protection fuseblows, the door opening/closing mechanism must bereset as follows:

1. Close all the doors.

2. Push the unlock button on the key fob or the doorlocking/unlocking LED indicator button on thedashboard.

3. Push the lock button on the key fob or the doorlocking/unlocking LED indicator button on thedashboard.

WINDOWS

Power Windows

NOTE:

• These operate when the ignition key is turned toMAR/ON/RUN and for about three minutes afterthe ignition key is turned to STOP or removed unlessone of the doors is opened.

• The buttons are located on the center console.

Push/Pull the corresponding buttons to open/close thedesired window.

When one of the two buttons is pushed briefly, thewindow moves in stages; if the button is held down toopen, �continuous automatic� operation is activated.

If the button is pushed again, the window will stop inits current position. If the button is pushed for severalseconds, the window lowers automatically (only withignition key in MAR/ON/RUN position).

Power Window Switch

1 — Driver Power Window Switch2 — Passenger Power Window Switch


Continuous Automatic Operation

This is activated by pushing one of the two buttons forlonger than half a second. The window will stop whenit is fully opened, or when the button is pushed again.

It can be used on both the driver side and passengerside, only for lowering the window.

Electric Window System Reset

After a break in power supply for the control units(battery replaced or disconnected or protective fuses forthe electric window control units replaced), the auto-matic operation of the windows must be restored.

The restoration procedure must be performed as de-scribed below with the doors closed:

1. Completely open the driver’s door window keepingthe operating button pushed for at least three sec-onds after the (lower) end of travel position isreached.

2. Completely raise the driver side window and holdthe button down for at least three seconds once the(upper) end of travel position has been reached.

3. Proceed in the same way as described in points 1 and2 for the passenger side door.

4. Make sure that the reset is correct by checking thatthe windows work automatically.

WARNING!

Improper actuation of the power windows may bedangerous. Never leave children unattended in avehicle, and do not let children play with powerwindows. Before and during window operationmake sure no one and no object (including cloth-ing) is in the path of the moving glass or itsmechanism. Do not leave the Key Fob in or near thevehicle, or in a location accessible to children.Occupants, particularly unattended children, canbecome entrapped by the windows while operatingthe power window switches. Such entrapment mayresult in serious injury or death.

2


DECKLID

NOTE: During normal vehicle operation, the luggagecompartment can reach temperatures above 149º F (65° C).Pay attention when transporting objects that may bedamaged at such temperatures. Do not keep aerosol cansin the vehicle: danger of explosion. Aerosol cans must notbe exposed to temperatures above 122º F (50° C).

Opening Procedure

With driver side door open, pull the decklid releaselever #1 located at the point illustrated in the figure.

Raise the decklid and release supporting rod from itslocking device.

Insert the end of the rod in housing, making sure thatthe rod engages in the smallest hole of the retaining clip.Care must be taken to keep the decklid raised until therod is fixed in the correct position.

Decklid Release Lever Location

1 — Decklid Release Lever


NOTE: Maintain a tight grip on the decklid whenraising, in order to prevent any external occurrence (e.g.a gust of wind) from suddenly opening the decklid toend of travel. Additionally, in order to prevent anydamage to the vehicle or broken windows, do not forcethe decklid beyond the opening position necessary tosecure the supporting rod in the hole of the retainingclip.

Closing Procedure

1. Hold the decklid up with one hand and use the otherto remove rod from housing and reinsert it in itslocking device.

2. Lower the decklid approximately 7.8 inches (20 cm)from the engine compartment and let it drop. Makesure that the decklid is completely closed and notonly fastened in safety position by trying to open it.If it is not completely closed, do not push the deckliddown, but raise it and repeat the procedure.

NOTE: Always check that the decklid is closed correctlyto prevent it from opening while the vehicle is travel-ling.

WARNING!

• The maximum permitted load in the luggagecompartment, in addition to the kits provided, is33.1 lbs. (15 kg). Do not exceed the maximumpermitted load in the luggage compartment.

• When accessing the rear luggage compartment, donot come into contact with engine, or other com-ponents, that may be hot and could burn you iftouched.

• Access the luggage compartment only with thevehicle stationary. Before exiting a vehicle, alwaysshift the vehicle into FIRST gear or REVERSE,apply the parking brake, turn the vehicle OFF,and remove the key fob from the ignition.

• The decklid may drop suddenly, causing seriousinjury, if the supporting rod is not positionedcorrectly.

• The decklid must always be closed properly, andthe lock engaged, while the vehicle is in motion.

2


OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety features in yourvehicle are the restraint systems:

Occupant Restraint Systems Features

• Seat Belt Systems

• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags

• Child Restraints

Some of the safety features described in this sectionmay be standard equipment on some models, or may beoptional equipment on others. If you are not sure, askyour authorized dealer.

Important Safety Precautions

Please pay close attention to the information in thissection. It tells you how to use your restraint systemproperly, to keep you and your passengers as safe aspossible.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimizethe risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ridebuckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facingchild restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,move the seat as far back as possible and use theproper child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” inthis section for further information).

3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicleseat belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in thissection for further information) should be secured ina vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints orbelt-positioning booster seats. Older children who donot use child restraints or belt-positioning boosterseats should ride properly buckled up in a vehiclewith a rear seat.

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder beltbehind them or under their arm.

5. You should read the instructions provided with yourchild restraint to make sure that you are using itproperly.

6. All occupants should always wear their lap andshoulder belts properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seats should bemoved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to inflate.


8. Do not lean against the door or window. If yourvehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, theside air bags will inflate forcefully into the spacebetween occupants and the door and occupantscould be injured.

9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to bemodified to accommodate a disabled person, refer tothe “If You Need Consumer Assistance” section forcustomer service contact information.

WARNING!

• NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on aseat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front ofit, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILDcan occur.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehiclewith a rear seat.

• A deploying passenger front air bag can causedeath or serious injury to a child 12 years oryounger, including a child in a rear-facing childrestraint.

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, evenon short trips. Someone on the road may be a poordriver and could cause a collision that includes you.This can happen far away from home or on your ownstreet.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and theycan reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.Some of the worst injuries happen when people arethrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibil-ity of ejection and the risk of injury caused by strikingthe inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicleshould be belted at all times.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System

Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)

BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind thedriver and outboard front seat passenger (ifequipped with outboard front passenger seatBeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alertfeature is active whenever the ignition switch is inthe AVV/START or MAR/ON/RUN position.

2


Initial Indication

If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch isfirst in the AVV/START or MAR/ON/RUN position, achime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver oroutboard front seat passenger (if equipped with out-board front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckledwhen the ignition switch is first in the AVV/START orMAR/ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Lightwill turn on and remain on until both outboard frontseat belts are buckled. The outboard front passengerseat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard frontpassenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert Warning Sequence

The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when thevehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed rangeand the driver or outboard front seat passenger isunbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passengerseat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seatBeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passen-ger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning se-quence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Lightand sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlertwarning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Re-minder Light will remain on until the seat belts are

buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeatbased on vehicle speed until the driver and occupiedoutboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle theirseat belts.

Change Of Status

If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (ifequipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seatbelts are buckled again.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not activewhen the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or otheritems are placed on the outboard front passenger seat orwhen the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recom-mended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (ifequipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that aresecured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.

BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your au-thorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommenddeactivating BeltAlert.


NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driveror outboard front seat passenger (if equipped withoutboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckledthe Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain onuntil the driver and outboard front seat passenger seatbelts are buckled.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped withlap/shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only duringvery sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows theshoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with youunder normal conditions. However, in a collision theseat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking theinside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to moresevere injuries in a collision. The air bags workwith your seat belt to restrain you properly. In somecollisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Alwayswear your seat belt even though you have air bags.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer

much greater injuries if you are not properlybuckled up. You can strike the interior of yourvehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrownout of the vehicle. Always be sure you and othersin your vehicle are buckled up properly.

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside oroutside of a vehicle. In a collision, people ridingin these areas are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of yourvehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbelts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a seat belt properly. Occupants, includingthe driver, should always wear their seat beltswhether or not an air bag is also provided at theirseating position to minimize the risk of severeinjury or death in the event of a crash.

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could makeyour injuries in a collision much worse. Youmight suffer internal injuries, or you could even

(Continued)

2


WARNING! (Continued)slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructionsto wear your seat belt safely and to keep yourpassengers safe, too.

• Two people should never be belted into a single seatbelt. People belted together can crash into one an-other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Neveruse a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more thanone person, no matter what their size.

WARNING!

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk ofinjury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t beat the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across yourabdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seatbelt as low as possible and keep it snug.

• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly.In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be surethe seat belt is flat against your body, withouttwists. If you can’t straighten a seat belt in yourvehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immedi-ately and have it fixed.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle

will not protect you properly. The lap portioncould ride too high on your body, possibly caus-ing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat beltinto the buckle nearest you.

• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect youproperly. In a sudden stop, you could move too farforward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wearyour seat belt snugly.

• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dan-gerous. Your body could strike the inside surfacesof the vehicle in a collision, increasing head andneck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm cancause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong asshoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over yourshoulder so that your strongest bones will takethe force in a collision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not pro-tect you from injury during a collision. You aremore likely to hit your head in a collision if youdo not wear your shoulder belt. The lap andshoulder belt are meant to be used together.

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued)• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a

collision and leave you with no protection. In-spect the seat belt system periodically, checkingfor cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts mustbe replaced immediately. Do not disassemble ormodify the seat belt system. Seat belt assembliesmust be replaced after a collision.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back andadjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the frontseat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (forvehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latchplate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plateup the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seatbelt to go around your lap.

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert thelatch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

2


4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies lowacross your hips, below your abdomen. To removeslack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulderbelt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt thelatch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat beltreduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in acollision.

5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder andchest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-able and not resting on your neck. The retractor willwithdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on thebuckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to itsstowed position. If necessary, slide the latch platedown the webbing to allow the seat belt to retractfully.

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt


Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to theanchor point.

2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latchplate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180degrees to create a fold that begins immediatelyabove the latch plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded web-bing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at thetop of the latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears thefolded webbing and the seat belt is no longertwisted.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants includingpregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of anaccident is reduced for the mother and the unborn childif they are wearing a seat belt.

Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomenand across the strong bones of the hips. Place theshoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or underthe arm.

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts

2


Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front seat belt system is equipped with pretension-ing devices that are designed to remove slack from theseat belt in the event of a collision. These devices mayimprove the performance of the seat belt by removingslack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretension-ers work for all size occupants, including those in childrestraints.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for properseat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt stillmust be worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner ora deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

Energy Management Feature

This vehicle has a seat belt system with an EnergyManagement feature in the front seating positions thatmay help further reduce the risk of injury in the event ofa collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assemblythat is designed to release webbing in a controlledmanner.

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The seat belt in the passenger seating position isequipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-tor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraintsystem. For additional information, refer to “InstallingChild Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the“Child Restraints” section of this manual. The figurebelow illustrates the locking feature for each seatingposition.

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Location


If the passenger seating position is equipped with anALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull theseat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wraparound the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activatethe ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clickingsound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing toretract completely in this case and then carefully pullout only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide thelatch plate into the buckle until you hear a �click.�

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract toremove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Auto-matic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is in-stalled in a seating position that has a seat belt with thisfeature. Children 12 years old and under should alwaysbe properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front ofan air bag. A deploying passenger front air bagcan cause death or serious injury to a child

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.


How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward untilthe entire seat belt is extracted.

3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seatbelt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allowit to retract completely to disengage the AutomaticLocking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emer-gency) locking mode.

2


WARNING!

• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if theswitchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)feature or any other seat belt function is notworking properly when checked according to theprocedures in the Service Manual.

• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly couldincrease the risk of injury in collisions.

• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to re-strain occupants who are wearing the seat belt orchildren who are using booster seats. The lockedmode is only used to install rear-facing orforward-facing child restraints that have a har-ness for restraining the child.

Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)

Some of the safety features described in this sectionmay be standard equipment on some models, or may beoptional equipment on others. If you are not sure, askyour authorized dealer.

The air bag system must be ready to protect you in acollision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wir-ing associated with the electrical Air Bag System Com-ponents. Your vehicle may be equipped with the fol-lowing Air Bag System Components:

Air Bag System Components

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag Warning Light

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

• Supplemental Side Air Bags

• Supplemental Knee Air Bags

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Seat Belt Pretensioners

• Seat Track Position Sensors

• Seat Belt Buckle Switch


Air Bag Warning Light

The ORC monitors the readiness of the elec-tronic parts of the air bag system wheneverthe ignition switch is in the AVV/START orMAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If the igni-

tion switch is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK position or inthe ACC position, the air bag system is not on and theair bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system thatmay deploy the air bag system even if the battery losespower or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in theinstrument panel for approximately four to eight sec-onds for a self-check when the ignition switch is in theMAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. After the self-check,the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORCdetects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turnson the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily orcontinuously. A single chime will sound to alert you ifthe light comes on again after initial startup.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminatethe instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. Thediagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.

While the air bag system is designed to be maintenancefree, if any of the following occurs, have an authorizeddealer service the air bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on duringthe four to eight seconds when the ignition switch isfirst in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.

• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the fourto eight-second interval.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittentlyor remains on while driving.

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any enginerelated gauges are not working, the Occupant RestraintController (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condi-tion the air bags may not be ready to inflate for yourprotection. Have an authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately.

WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bagsto protect you in a collision. If the light does not

(Continued)

2


WARNING! (Continued)come on as a bulb check when the ignition is firstturned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or ifit comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealerservice the air bag system immediately.

Front Air Bags

This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder beltsfor both the driver and front passenger. The front airbags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems.The driver front air bag is mounted in the center of thesteering wheel. The passenger front air bag is mountedin the instrument panel, above the glove compartment.The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossedon the air bag covers.

WARNING!

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-ment panel during front air bag deploymentcould cause serious injury, including death. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably

(Continued)

Front Air Bag Locations

1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental DriverKnee Air Bag


WARNING! (Continued)extending your arms to reach the steering wheelor instrument panel.

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front ofan air bag. A deploying passenger front air bagcan cause death or serious injury to a child 12years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.


Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistagedriver and front passenger air bags. This system pro-vides output appropriate to the severity and type ofcollision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Con-troller (ORC), which may receive information from thefront impact sensors (if equipped) or other systemcomponents.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately duringan impact that requires air bag deployment. A lowenergy output is used in less severe collisions. A higherenergy output is used for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/orfront passenger seat belt buckle switch that detectswhether the driver or front passenger seat belt isbuckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust theinflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.

This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or frontpassenger seat track position sensors that may adjustthe inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags basedupon seat position.

WARNING!

• No objects should be placed over or near the airbag on the instrument panel or steering wheelbecause any such objects could cause harm if thevehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause theair bag to inflate.

• Do not put anything on or around the air bagcovers or attempt to open them manually. Youmay damage the air bags and you could beinjured because the air bags may no longer befunctional. The protective covers for the air bagcushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.

(Continued)

2


WARNING! (Continued)• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more

severe injuries in a collision. The air bags workwith your seat belt to restrain you properly. Insome collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all.Always wear your seat belts even though youhave air bags.

Front Air Bag Operation

Front Air Bags are designed to provide additionalprotection by supplementing the seat belts. Front airbags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear,side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will notdeploy in all frontal collisions, including some that mayproduce substantial vehicle damage — for example,some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offsetcollisions.

On the other hand, depending on the type and locationof impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes withlittle vehicle front-end damage but that produce asevere initial deceleration.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle decelerationover time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves arenot good indicators of whether or not an air bag shouldhave deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in allcollisions, and also are needed to help keep you inposition, away from an inflating air bag.

When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front airbags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity ofnon-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper rightside of the instrument panel separate and fold out of theway as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front airbags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink youreyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate whilehelping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

Knee Impact Bolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of thedriver and front passenger, and position the frontoccupants for improved interaction with the front airbags.


WARNING!

• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impactbolsters in any way.

• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impactbolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen bandradios, etc.

Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag

This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental DriverKnee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel belowthe steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee AirBag provides enhanced protection during a frontalimpact by working together with the seat belts, preten-sioners, and front air bags.

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Supplemental Door-Integrated Side Air Bag Inflat-able Curtains (SABICs)

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Door-Integrated Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and otherinjuries to front seat outboard occupants in certain side

impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potentialprovided by the seat belts and body structure.

The SABICs are located in the door trim below the sidewindows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRSAIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial orcomplete ejection of vehicle occupants through sidewindows in certain side impact events.

The SABICs deploy upward, covering the side win-dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge ofthe trim out of the way and covers the window. TheSABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants ifthey are not belted and seated properly, or if items arepositioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Chil-dren are at an even greater risk of injury from adeploying air bag.

SABICs are designed to activate in certain side impacts.The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determineswhether the deployment of the SABIC in a particularimpact event is appropriate, based on the severity andtype of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC indetermining the appropriate response to impact events.The system is calibrated to deploy the SABIC on the

2


impact side of the vehicle during impacts that requireSABIC occupant protection. In side impacts, the SABICsdeploy independently; a left side impact deploys theleft side SABIC only and a right-side impact deploys theright side SABIC only. Vehicle damage by itself is not agood indicator of whether or not SABICs should havedeployed.

SABICs will not deploy in all side collisions, includingsome collisions at certain angles, or some side collisionsthat do not impact the area of the passenger compart-ment. SABICs may deploy during angled or offsetfrontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.

SABICs are a supplement to the seat belt restraintsystem. SABICs deploy in less time than it takes to blinkyour eyes.

WARNING!

• Occupants, including children, who are upagainst or very close to SABICs can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Occupants, including children,should never lean on or sleep against the door,side windows, or area where the side air bags

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)inflate, even if they are in an infant or childrestraint.

• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)are necessary for your protection in all collisions.They also help keep you in position, away froman inflating SABIC. To get the best protectionfrom the SABICs, occupants must wear their seatbelts properly and sit upright with their backsagainst the seats. Children must be properly re-strained in a child restraint or booster seat that isappropriate for the size of the child.

• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up highenough to block the deployment of the SABICs.The door trim below the side windows where theSABIC and its deployment path are locatedshould remain free from any obstructions.

• SABICs need room to inflate. Do not lean againstthe door or window. Sit upright in the center ofthe seat.

• Being too close to the SABICs during deploymentcould cause you to be severely injured or killed.

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued)• Relying on the SABICs alone could lead to more

severe injuries in a collision. The SABICs workwith your seat belt to restrain you properly. Insome collisions, SABICs won’t deploy at all. Al-ways wear your seat belt even though you haveSABICs.

NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious to you, butthey will open during air bag deployment.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial orcomplete ejection of vehicle occupants through sidewindows in certain side impact events.

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors theinternal circuits and interconnecting wiring associatedwith electrical Air Bag System Components listed be-low:

Air Bag System Components

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag Warning Light

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

• Supplemental Side Air Bags

• Supplemental Knee Air Bags

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Seat Belt Pretensioners

• Seat Track Position Sensors

• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

If A Deployment Occurs

The front air bags are designed to deflate immediatelyafter deployment.

NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in allcollisions. This does not mean something is wrong withthe air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags,any or all of the following may occur:

• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasionsand/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bagsdeploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to frictionrope burns or those you might get sliding along a

2


carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused bycontact with chemicals. They are not permanent andnormally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healedsignificantly within a few days, or if you have anyblistering, see your doctor immediately.

• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-likeparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of theprocess that generates the non-toxic gas used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritatethe skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eyeirritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose orthroat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritationcontinues, see your doctor. If these particles settle onyour clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’sinstructions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags havedeployed. If you are involved in another collision, theair bags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannotprotect you in another collision. Have the air bags,

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractorassemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint ControllerSystem serviced as well.

NOTE:

• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interiortrim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to anauthorized dealer immediately.

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact, if the communication net-work remains intact, and the power remains intact,depending on the nature of the event, the ORC willdetermine whether to have the Enhanced AccidentResponse System perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power oruntil the hazard light button is pressed. The hazardlights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard lightbutton.


• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as longas the battery has power or for 15 minutes from theintervention of the Enhanced Accident ResponseSystem.

• Unlock the power door locks.

Enhanced Accident Response System ResetProcedure

After the event occurs, when the system is active, amessage regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn theignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Care-fully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the enginecompartment and on the ground near the engine com-partment and fuel tank before resetting the system andstarting the engine.

Depending on the nature of the event the left and rightturn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, mayboth be blinking and will continue to blink. In order tomove your vehicle to the side of the road, you mustfollow the system reset procedure.

Customer Action Customer Will See

NOTE: Each step MUST BE held for at leasttwo seconds1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.(Turn Signal Must beplaced in Neutral State).2. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN.

Right turn light BLINKS.Left turn light is OFF.

3. Turn right turn signalswitch ON.

Right turn light is ONSOLID.Left turn light BLINKS.

4. Place turn signal inneutral state.

Right turn light is OFF.Left turn light BLINKS.

5. Turn left turn signalswitch ON.

Right turn light BLINKS.Left turn light is ONSOLID.

6. Place turn signal inneutral state.

Right turn light BLINKS.Left turn light is OFF.

7. Turn right turn signalswitch ON.

Right turn light is ONSOLID.Left turn light BLINKS.

2


Customer Action Customer Will See

NOTE: Each step MUST BE held for at leasttwo seconds8. Place turn signal inneutral state.

Right turn light is OFF.Left turn light BLINKS

9. Turn left turn signalswitch ON.

Right turn light is ONSOLID.Left turn light is ONSOLID.

10. Turn left turn signalswitch OFF. (Turn SignalSwitch Must be placedin Neutral State).

Right turn light is OFF.Left turn light is OFF.

11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.12. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. (Entiresequence needs to becompleted within oneminute or sequence willneed to be repeated).

System is now reset andthe engine may bestarted.

Turn hazard flashersOFF (Manually)

If a reset procedure step is not completed within60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and thereset procedure must be performed again in order to besuccessful.

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the air bag systemcould cause it to fail when you need it. You couldbe injured if the air bag system is not there toprotect you. Do not modify the components orwiring, including adding any kind of badges orstickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or theupper right side of the instrument panel. Do notmodify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, oradd aftermarket side steps or running boards.

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone whoworks on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.

• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bagsystem. The air bag may inflate accidentally ormay not function properly if modifications aremade. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued)for any air bag system service. If your seat,including your trim cover and cushion, needs tobe serviced in any way (including removal orloosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Onlymanufacturer approved seat accessories may beused. If it is necessary to modify the air bagsystem for persons with disabilities, contact yourauthorized dealer.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, incertain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-formed. The EDR is designed to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short periodof time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in thisvehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety beltswere buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

• These data can help provide a better understandingof the circumstances in which crashes and injuriesoccur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if anon-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recordedby the EDR under normal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash loca-tion) are recorded. However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying data routinely acquired dur-ing a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment isrequired, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-ment, can read the information if they have access to thevehicle or the EDR.

2


Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at alltimes, including babies and children. Every state in theUnited States, and every Canadian province, requiresthat small children ride in proper restraint systems. Thisis the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properlybuckled up in a rear seat, if available. According tocrash statistics, children are safer when properly re-strained in the rear seats rather than in the front.

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can become aprojectile inside the vehicle. The force required tohold even an infant on your lap could become sogreat that you could not hold the child, no matterhow strong you are. The child and others could bebadly injured. Any child riding in your vehicleshould be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

There are different sizes and types of restraints forchildren from newborn size to the child almost largeenough for an adult safety belt. Always check the childseat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correctseat for your child. Carefully read and follow all theinstructions and warnings in the child restraint Own-er’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the childrestraint.

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that ithas a label certifying that it meets all applicable SafetyStandards. You should also make sure that you caninstall it in the vehicle where you will use it.

NOTE:

• For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236

• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Cana-da’s website for additional information:http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm


www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm

www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm

www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm

www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height,Weight Or Age

Recommended TypeOf Child Restraint

Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old oryounger and who have not

reached the height or weight limitsof their child restraint

Either an Infant Carrier or a Con-vertible Child Restraint, facing

rearward in the rear seatof the vehicle

Small Children Children who are at least twoyears old or who have out-grownthe height or weight limit of their

rear-facing child restraint

Forward-Facing Child Restraintwith a five-point Harness, facing

forward in the rear seatof the vehicle

Larger Children Children who have out-growntheir forward-facing child restraint,

but are too small to properly fitthe vehicle’s seat belt

Belt Positioning Booster Seat andthe vehicle seat belt, seated in the

rear seat of the vehicle

Children Too Largefor Child Restraints

Children 12 years old or younger,who have out-grown the height orweight limit of their booster seat

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rearseat of the vehicle

2


Infant And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facingin the vehicle until they are two years old or until theyreach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints canbe used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible childseats.

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.It is recommended for children from birth until theyreach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing orforward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seatsoften have a higher weight limit in the rear-facingdirection than infant carriers do, so they can be usedrear-facing by children who have outgrown their infantcarrier but are still less than at least two years old.Children should remain rear-facing until they reach thehighest weight or height allowed by their convertiblechild seat.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front ofan air bag. A deploying passenger front air bagcan cause death or serious injury to a child12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.


Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or who have outgrowntheir rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats andconvertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-tion are for children who are over two years old or whohave outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit oftheir rear-facing convertible child seat. Children shouldremain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness foras long as possible, up to the highest weight or heightallowed by the child seat.

All children whose weight or height is above theforward-facing limit for the child seat should use abelt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seatbelts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent


over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back isagainst the seatback, they should use a belt-positioningbooster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seatare held in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation can lead to failure of aninfant or child restraint. It could come loose in acollision. The child could be badly injured orkilled. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’sdirections exactly when installing an infant orchild restraint.

• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, donot move the vehicle seat forward or rearwardbecause it can loosen the child restraint attach-ments. Remove the child restraint before adjustingthe vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat hasbeen adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.

• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it inthe vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loosein the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it couldstrike the occupants or seatbacks and cause seriouspersonal injury.

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulderbelt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough tobend over the front of the seat when their back isagainst the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rearseat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether thechild can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back ofthe vehicle seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the frontof the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all theway back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulderbetween their neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touchingthe child’s thighs and not their stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

2


If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” thenthe child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle.If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seatbelt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle islatched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move thebelt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the faceor neck, move the child closer to the center of thevehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt onthe child correctly.

WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt underan arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulderbelt will not protect a child properly, which mayresult in serious injury or death. A child mustalways wear both the lap and shoulder portions ofthe seat belt correctly.

Installing Child Restraints Using The VehicleSeat Belt

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured invehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of alap/shoulder belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation or failure to properly securea child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.The child could be badly injured or killed.

• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s direc-tions exactly when installing an infant or childrestraint.

The seat belts in the rear passenger seating positions areequipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-tor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of theseat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is notnecessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of thewebbing out of the retractor and then letting the web-bing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, theALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing ispulled back into the retractor. Refer to the “AutomaticLocking Mode” description in “Switchable AutomaticLocking Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant RestraintSystems” for additional information on ALR.

Please see the table below and the following sections formore information.


Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing ChildRestraints In This Vehicle

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Location

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

• Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

2


Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat BeltsWhat is the weight limit (child’sweight + weight of the child re-

straint) for using the Tether Anchorwith the seat belt to attach a

forward facing child restraint?

Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor whenusing the seat belt to install a for-ward facing child restraint, up tothe recommended weight limit of

the child restraint.Can the head restraints

be removed?No

Can the buckle stalk be twisted totighten the seat belt against the belt

path of the child restraint?

No Do not twist the buckle stalk in aseating position with

an ALR retractor.

Installing A Child Restraint With A SwitchableAutomatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured invehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of alap/shoulder belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation or failure to properly securea child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.The child could be badly injured or killed.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s direc-

tions exactly when installing an infant or childrestraint.

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seatingposition. Move the vehicle seat as far rearward aspossible to keep the child as far from the advancedpassenger air bag as possible.


2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from theretractor to pass it through the belt path of the childrestraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the beltpath.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a“click.”

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tightagainst the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder partof the belt until you have pulled all the seat beltwebbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the web-bing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbingretracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This meansthe seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it islocked, you should not be able to pull out anywebbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten thelap portion around the child restraint while you pushthe child restraint rearward and downward into thevehicle seat.

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and theseating position has a top tether anchorage, connectthe tether strap to the anchorage and tighten thetether strap. See the section “Installing Child Re-straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-tions to attach a tether anchor.

9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly bypulling back and forth on the child seat at the beltpath. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check thebelt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

2


Installing Child Restraints Using The Top TetherAnchorage:

WARNING!

Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seatto any location in front of the car seat, including theseat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach thetether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tetheranchorage that is approved for that seating position,located behind the top of the vehicle seat.

Always use the tether anchor when using the seat beltto install a forward facing child restraint, up to therecommended weight limit of the child restraint. Thisvehicle is equipped with a tether anchorage, locatedbehind the front passenger seat, near the floor.

1. Look behind the seating position where you plan toinstall the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.You may need to move the seat forward to providebetter access to the tether anchorage. If there is notop tether anchorage for that seating position, movethe child restraint to another position in the vehicle ifone is available.

2. Route the tether strap around the outboard side ofthe head restraint to the tether anchorage.

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint tothe top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.

Upper Tether Anchorage


4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to thechild restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WARNING!

An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead toincreased head motion and possible injury to thechild. Use only the anchorage position directlybehind the child seat to secure a child restraint toptether strap.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm yourpet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about andpossibly injured, or injure a passenger during panicbraking or in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet har-nesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain(engine, transmission, and rear axle) in your new ve-hicle.

Driving your vehicle with a new transmission requiresno special techniques but, to reach optimal shiftingquality and help with engine Break-in, Dynamic andRace Mode will be inhibited until the vehicle hasaccumulated 155 miles (250 km).

Additionally, for the first 200 miles (300 km), followingthese few simple guidelines is all that is necessary for agood break-in.

• Avoid very aggressive driving.

• Avoid driving at a constant speed, either fast or slow,for long periods.

• Do not make any full throttle starts and avoid fullthrottle acceleration while cruising within the postedspeed limits of local traffic laws.

• Use the proper gear for your speed range.

• Wait until the engine has reached normal operatingtemperature before driving at the recommendedmaximum break-in speed.

• Avoid excessive idling.

• Check the engine oil level at every fuel fill.

2


SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGOAREA.

WARNING!

• Do not leave children or animals inside parkedvehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-upmay cause serious injury or death.

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,people riding in these areas are more likely to beseriously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of yourvehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbelts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a seat belt properly.

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They containcarbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odor-less. Breathing it can make you unconscious andcan eventually poison you. To avoid breathing(CO), follow these safety tips:• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in

confined areas any longer than needed to moveyour vehicle in or out of the area.

• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all win-dows are closed and the climate control BLOWERswitch is set at high speed. DO NOT use therecirculation mode.

• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with theengine running, adjust your heating or coolingcontrols to force outside air into the vehicle. Setthe blower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry intothe vehicle body is a properly maintained engine ex-haust system.


Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of theexhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detectedinside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of thevehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspectthe complete exhaust system and adjacent body areasfor broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositionedparts. Open seams or loose connections could permitexhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment.In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time thevehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace asrequired.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside TheVehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replacedimmediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after acollision. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after acollision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regardingbelt or retractor condition, replace the belt.


The light should come on and remain on for four toeight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is firstcycled to ON. If the light is not lit during starting, seeyour authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, orcomes on while driving, have the system checked by anauthorized dealer.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode andplace the blower control on high speed. You should beable to feel the air directed against the windshield. Seeyour authorized dealer for service if your defroster isinoperable.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell ofyour vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedalarea unobstructed and that are firmly secured so thatthey cannot slip out of position and interfere with thepedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in otherways.

2


WARNING!

An improperly attached, damaged, folded, orstacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fastenersmay cause your floor mat to interfere with theaccelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and cause a lossof vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY orDEATH:• ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using

the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install yourfloor mat upside down or turn your floor matover. Lightly pull to confirm mat is securedusing the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.

• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOORMAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installingany other floor mat. NEVER install or stack anadditional floor mat on top of an existing floormat.

• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit yourvehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot beproperly attached and secured to your vehicle. If afloor mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCAapproved floor mat for the specific make, model,and year of your vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the

driver’s side floor area. To check for interference,with the vehicle properly parked with the engineoff, fully depress the accelerator, the brake, andthe clutch pedal (if present) to check for interfer-ence. If your floor mat interferes with the opera-tion of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,remove the floor mat from the vehicle and placethe floor mat in your trunk.

• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on thepassenger’s side floor area.

• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slideinto the driver’s side floor area when the vehicleis moving. Objects can become trapped underaccelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and couldcause a loss of vehicle control.

• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects couldchange the position of the floor mat and maycause interference with the accelerator, brake, orclutch pedals.

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued)• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-

installed, always properly attach carpet to thefloor and check the floor mat fasteners are secureto the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal tocheck for interference with the accelerator, brake,or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.

• It is recommended to only use mild soap andwater to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,always check your floor mat has been properlyinstalled and is secured to your vehicle using thefloor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.

Periodic Safety Checks You Should MakeOutside The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wearpatterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objectslodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall forcuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.Check the tires for proper pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brake lightsand exterior lights while you work the controls. Checkturn signal and high beam indicator lights on theinstrument panel.

Door Latches

Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking forfuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, ifgasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steeringfluid (if equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected,the cause should be located and corrected immediately.

2


UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS� MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

▫ Folding Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

▫ Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

� REMOVABLE SOFT TOP — IF EQUIPPED. . . . .65

▫ Installing The Soft Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

� SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

▫ Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

▫ Non-Adjustable Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . .73

� TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE DECKLID . . . . . .74

� LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

▫ Multifunction Lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

▫ Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

▫ High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

▫ Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

▫ Dimmer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

▫ Interior Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

� WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . .81

▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

3

▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

� TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .82

� SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .83

▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

� PARKING SENSORS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .86

▫ Activation/Deactivation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

▫ Acoustic Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

▫ Indications On Display — If Equipped . . . . . .86

▫ Fault Indication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

▫ General Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

� POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

� CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER —IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

� CUPHOLDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

� STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

▫ Seatback Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

▫ Rear Compartment Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

62 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night Mirror

A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It isa twist on mirror that has a fixed position at thewindshield. The mirror installs on the windshield but-ton with a counterclockwise rotation and requires notools for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up,down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirrorshould be adjusted to center on the view through therear window.

Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be re-duced by moving the small control under the mirror tothe night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). Themirror should be adjusted while the small control underthe mirror is set in the day position (toward thewindshield).

Outside Mirrors

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrorsto center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slightoverlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.

NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror willgive a much wider view to the rear, and especially of thelane next to your vehicle.

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

3

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 63

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passengerside convex mirror will look smaller and fartheraway than they really are. Relying too much on yourpassenger side mirror could cause you to collidewith another vehicle or other object. Use yourinside mirror when judging the size or distance of avehicle seen in the passenger side mirror.

Power Mirrors

The power mirror controls are located on the centerconsole. The power mirror controls consist of a mirror select

knob and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust amirror, turn the power mirror control knob to the left orright to select the mirror that you want to adjust.

Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the fourarrows for the direction that you want the selectedmirror to move.

Power Mirror Control


Folding Mirrors

The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror topivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. Themirror has three detent positions: full forward, fullrearward and normal.

Heated Mirrors

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.This feature can be activated whenever youturn on the mirror defroster. The DoorDemist/Defrost button is located in the

switch bank above the Climate Controls.

REMOVABLE SOFT TOP — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with a removable softtop.

To remove the soft top, proceed as follows:

1. Turn the front locking handles located near the sunvisors to the left one quarter turn.

Folding Mirrors

Front Locking Handles

3


2. From the passenger side with the door open, movethe two side locking handles towards each other andlift the top from the retainers.

3. Roll up the soft top to the center of the vehicle, repeatthe procedure on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

4. Remove the soft top with both sides rolled up andstore it in the storage bag that is provided.

Installing The Soft Top

To install the soft top, proceed as follows:

1. With the doors open, take the soft top and place it incenter of the vehicle.

Side Locking Handles

Soft Top Removal


2. Unfold the top and be sure to position the front edge(red strip) under the spoiler of the vehicle.

3. As the side beam is unrolled, engage the two fixedlocating pins (1 front, 1 rear) into their retainers.

Installing Top Under The Vehicle Spoiler

1 — Spoiler2 — Red Strip

Locating Pins Seating In The Vehicle

3


4. Move the side locking handles inward. 5. Rotate down the side beam.

Unlocking The Side Beam Rotating The Side Beam Down


6. Release the handles and complete the rotation to lockthe soft top.

7. Check to make sure that the handles are locked inplace.

8. Repeat this procedure on both sides of the vehicle.Soft Top In Locking Position Handles In Locked Position

3


9. Insert the front locking handles located near the sunvisors in the proper holes and turn them to the rightone quarter turn.

NOTE:

• Do not attach a roof rack on the soft top.

• Do not keep the soft top folded for long periods oftime.

• Do not remove ice from the top with a sharp object.

• Do not put objects on the top. The object could fall ifthe top is operated causing damage and injury.

• The cooled air flow into the passenger compartmentmay decrease if the automatic climate control systemis on and the top is not all the way closed.

• With the top open and the vehicle travelling, thespeech recognition system along with the dial num-ber command, may not be recognized because of thebackground noise if equipped.

• With the top installed at speeds higher than 80 mph(130 km/h), optimal comfort may not be achieved.

The top fabric is treated with a special water repellent,waterproof product. The water-repellent propertieswill degrade in time with exposure to the weatherelements. Observe the following instructions forwashing:

NOTE:

• Use of specific products is recommended for washingthe top.

• Bird droppings must be washed off immediately andthoroughly as the acid they contain is particularlyaggressive.

• Never use high-pressure washing systems.

Handles In Locked Position


• Hand washing is recommended; modern automaticwashing systems equipped with soft brushes whichdo not apply excessive pressure and employ specificsoft top products may be used.

• When using steam washers or high-pressure powerwashers, maintain a suitable distance and do notexceed a maximum temperature of 140 °F (60 °C).Damage, alterations and water infiltrations may oc-cur if the distance is too small.

• If a water jet is used, direct away from the edges ofthe fabric to prevent water infiltrations.

• Never use alcohol, petroleum products, chemicalproducts, detergents, stain removers, wax, solvents,and “wash and polish” products.

• Remove as much dirt from the surface of the top witha soft brush or vacuum cleaner before washing it.This operation will considerably improve the finalresult. In lack of specific products, use water andmild soap applied with a sponge preferably in theshade for washing. Rinse the top with clean waterafter having eliminated all the stains.

• Rinse immediately to remove soap to prevent stains.

• Leave the vehicle in the shade after washing avoid-ing direct sunlight.

• Use specific waterproofing products for fabric topsand follow the instructions on the product containerfor best results.

• The rubber seals of the top must be washed withwater only. Apply talcum power or use specificrubber care products (silicone spray) if the seals aredry or partially stuck.

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of thevehicle.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside oroutside of a vehicle. In a collision, people ridingin these areas are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed.

(Continued)

3


WARNING! (Continued)• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbelts. In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a seat belt properly.

Manual Seats

Forward And Rearward Adjustment

The adjusting bar is at the front of the driver seat, nearthe floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat forwardor rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in thedesired position. Then, using body pressure, moveforward and rearward on the seat to be sure that theseat adjusters have latched.

Seat Height Adjustment

In order to achieve the ideal driving position, the heightof the seats can also be adjusted. Tools are required tomake this height adjustment. Contact your authorizeddealership.

Recliner Adjustment

The recliner lever is located on the outboard side of theseat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, pull therecliner lever upward, lean backward until the seat is inthe desired position, and release the lever. To return theseat to its full upright position, lean forward, pull the

Seat Adjustment Bar


recliner lever upward and hold it until the seat returnsto its full upright position.

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.Moving a seat while driving could result in lossof control which could cause a collision andserious injury or death.

• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seatbelts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)injury or death could result from a poorly ad-justed seat belt.

• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that theshoulder belt is no longer resting against yourchest. In a collision, you could slide under theseat belt, which could result in serious injury ordeath.

Non-Adjustable Head Restraints

The non-adjustable head restraints are form fitted intothe upper structure of the seatback and are designed toreduce the risk of injury by restricting head movementin the event of a rear impact. The seatback should beproperly adjusted to an upright position where the headrestraint is positioned as close as possible to the back ofyour head.

WARNING!

Be certain that the seatback is locked securely intoposition. Otherwise, the seat will not provide theproper stability for passengers. An improperlylatched seatback could cause serious injury.

Recline Lever

3


TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE DECKLID

CAUTION!

• To prevent possible damage, do not slam thedecklid to close it. Use a firm downward push atthe center of the decklid to ensure the decklidlatch is fully engaged.

• During normal vehicle operation, the luggagecompartment (located rear of the engine) canreach temperatures above 149 °F (65 °C). Do nottransport objects in the luggage compartment thatmay be damaged at such temperatures. Do notplace aerosol cans in the luggage compartment.

To open the decklid:

1. Open the driver’s side door.

2. Pull the decklid release lever located on the rear ofthe driver’s door sill.

Decklid Release Lever


3. Move to the rear of the vehicle and lift the decklid. 4. Lift upward on the decklid prop rod to release itfrom the stowage retainer.

Decklid Lift Point LocationDecklid Prop Rod Location

1 — Decklid Prop Rod2 — Stowage Retainer Location

3


5. Place the decklid prop rod in the decklid slot tosecure the decklid in the open position.

WARNING!

• The maximum load limit for the luggage compart-ment, in addition to the kits provided, is 33.1 lbs.(15kg). Do not exceed the maximum permittedload in the luggage compartment. When accessingthe rear luggage compartment, do not come intocontact with engine, or other components, thatmay be hot and could burn you if touched.

• Access the luggage compartment only with thevehicle stationary. Before exiting the vehicle, youshould always place the vehicle into FIRST gearor REVERSE, apply the parking brake, and re-move the key from the ignition. Never leave thekey fob in the vehicle or in a location accessible tochildren.


• The decklid must always be closed properly, andthe lock engaged, while the vehicle is in motions.

Decklid Prop Rod Slot


LIGHTS

Multifunction Lever

The multifunction lever, located on the left side of thesteering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights,headlight high beams, lane change assist and turnsignals.

NOTE: The external lights can only be turned on withthe ignition in the ON/RUN position.

Headlights

Rotate the end of the multifunction leverupward to the first detent for headlightoperation.

NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the DaytimeRunning Lights will be deactivated.

Daytime Running Lights

To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotatethe end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol.

Multifunction Lever

Headlight Operation

3


NOTE: The low beams and side/tail lights will not beon with DRL.

High Beams

With the low beams activated, pull the multi-function lever towards the steering wheel to turn

on the high beams. A high beam symbol will illuminatein the cluster to indicate the high beams are on. Pull themultifunction lever a second time to switch the head-lights back to low beam.

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights bypartially pulling the multifunction lever toward thesteering wheel. This will cause the high beam head-lights to turn on until the lever is released.

Parking Lights

To turn on the parking lights, remove the keyor turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK positionand turn on the headlights.

Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and thearrows on each side of the instrument cluster displaywill flash to show proper operation of the front and rearturn signal lights.

NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, orthere is a very fast flash rate, check for a defectiveoutside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when thelever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulbis defective.

Lane Change Assist

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyondthe detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flashfive times then automatically turn off.

Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose tohave the headlights remain on for a preset period oftime after the engine is turned OFF.

Activation

Remove the key or turn the ignition to the STOP(OFF/LOCK) position, and pull the multifunction levertoward the steering wheel within two minutes. Each


time the lever is pulled, the activation of the lights willbe extended by 30 seconds. The activation of the lightscan be extended to a maximum of 210 seconds.

Deactivation

Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheeland hold it for more than two seconds.

Dimmer Controls

The dimmer controls are located on the left side of theinstrument panel below the instrument cluster.

Pushing the up or down arrow will increase or decreasethe brightness of the instrument panel lights.

Interior Light

The interior light is located in the headliner in betweenthe sun visors. The interior light can be set to threedifferent positions (off/left position, center position,on/right position).

Using the interior light lens, push the lens to the rightfrom its center position and the lights are always on.Push the lens to the left from its center position and thelights are always off. Leave the lens in the centerposition, and the light is turned on and off when thedoors are opened or closed.

Dimmer Controls

3


CAUTION!

Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that theOverhead Dome Lamp is in the center position orthat the lights are off to avoid draining the battery.

Interior Light Timing (Center Position)

There are four different modes of operation that can beactivated in this position:

• When one door is opened, a three minute timer isactivated.

• When the key is removed from the ignition (withintwo minutes of the ignition being turned OFF), a 10second timer is activated.

• When the doors are unlocked with the key fob, a 10second timer is activated.

• When the doors are locked with the key fob, thelights will turn off.

Interior Light (Off Position Shown)


WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The windshield wiper/washer controls are located onthe windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side ofthe steering column. The front wipers are operated byrotating the end of the lever.

Intermittent Wiper System

Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditionsrequire a single wiping cycle with a variable pausebetween cycles. To activate, rotate the end of the mul-tifunction lever upward to the first detent position forthe first delay interval setting. Continue to rotate the

end of the lever to the other detents for the other delayintervals that depend on the vehicle speed.

Windshield Wiper Operation

Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detentpast the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper op-eration. Rotate the end of the lever upward to thesecond detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.

Mist

Use the Mist feature when weather conditions makeoccasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the leverupward to the MIST position and release for a singlewiping cycle.

NOTE: The Mist feature does not activate the washerpump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on thewindshield. The wash function must be used in order tospray the windshield with washer fluid.

Windshield Washers

To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and holdwhile spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in thedelay range, the wiper will start and continue to operate

Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever

3


for three wipe cycles after the lever is released, and thenresume the intermittent interval previously selected.

If the lever is pulled while in the O (off) position, thewipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turnoff.

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshieldcould lead to a collision. You might not see othervehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing ofthe windshield during freezing weather, warm thewindshield with defroster before and during wind-shield washer use.

TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN

This feature allows you to tilt the steering columnupward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen orshorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping con-trol handle is located below the steering wheel at theend of the steering column.

To unlock the steering column, push the lever down-ward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,move the steering wheel upward or downward asdesired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column,pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward asdesired. To lock the steering column in position, pushthe lever upward until fully engaged.

Tilt/Telescoping Column Lever


WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving.Adjusting the steering column while driving ordriving with the steering column unlocked, couldcause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.Failure to follow this warning may result in seriousinjury or death.

SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelera-tor operations at speeds greater than 18 mph (30 km/h)up to the maximum speed of 105 mph (170 km/h).

The Speed Control Lever is located on the left side of thesteering column.

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the SpeedControl system has been designed to shut down ifmultiple speed control functions are operated at thesame time. If this occurs, the Speed Control system canbe reactivated rotating the end of the multifunctionlever (on/off) and resetting the desired vehicle setspeed.

To Activate

Rotate the end of the multifunction lever upward to thefirst detent, indicated by the speed control icon, toactivate the Speed Control. The Cruise Indicator Lightin the instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turnthe system off, rotate the end of the multifunction leverto the O (off) position. The Cruise Indicator Light willturn off. The system should be turned off when not inuse.

Speed Control Lever

3


WARNING!

Leaving the Speed Control system on when not inuse is dangerous. You could accidentally set thesystem or cause it to go faster than you want. Youcould lose control and have an accident. Alwaysleave the system off when you are not using it.

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle hasreached the desired speed, move the speed control leverupward (+), and release. Release the accelerator, and thevehicle will operate at the set speed.

NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steadyspeed, and on level ground before setting the speedcontrol.

To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL/RESUME button on the end of the stalk, or normalbrake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivatethe Speed Control without erasing the set speedmemory. Rotating the end of the multifunction lever tothe O (off) position, or turning the ignition switch toOFF, erases the set speed memory.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RESUMEbutton, located on the end of the speed control stalk,and release. Resume can be used at any speed above18 mph (30 km/h).

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Speed

When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speedby tapping the speed control lever up (+).

The speed increment shown is dependant on the speedof U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Tapping the speed control lever up (+) once willresult in a one mph increase in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the lever results in an increase ofone mph.

• If the lever is continually help up, the set speed willcontinue to increase until the lever is released, thenthe new set speed will be established.


Metric Speed (km/h)

• Tapping the speed control lever up (+) once willresult in a two km/h increase in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the lever results in an increase oftwo km/h.

• If the lever is continually help up, the set speed willcontinue to increase until the lever is released, thenthe new set speed will be established.

To Decrease Speed

When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speedby tapping the speed control lever down (-).

The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speedof U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Tapping the speed control lever down (-) once willresult in a one mph decrease in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the lever results in a decrease ofone mph.

• If the lever is continually held down, the set speedwill continue to decrease until the lever is released,then the new set speed will be established.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Tapping the speed control lever down (-) once willresult in a two km/h decrease in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the lever results in a decrease oftwo km/h.

• If the lever is continually held down, the set speedwill continue to decrease until the lever is released,then the new set speed will be established.

To Accelerate For Passing

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When thepedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

3


PARKING SENSORS — IF EQUIPPED

The vehicle’s parking sensors are located in the rearbumper, and will detect the presence of any obstaclesnear the rear part of the vehicle while moving inREVERSE gear. The driver is then informed through anintermittent acoustic signal.

Activation/Deactivation

The sensors are automatically activated when REVERSEgear is engaged. As the obstacle behind the vehicle getscloser, the acoustic signal becomes more frequent.

Acoustic Signal

When REVERSE gear is engaged, and there is anobstacle behind the vehicle, an acoustic signal is emittedwhich varies according to the distance of the bumperfrom the obstacle.

The frequency of the acoustic signal:

• Increases as the distance between vehicle and ob-stacle decreases, culminating in a continuous acous-tic signal when the distance is less than approxi-mately 12 in (30 cm).

• Decreases if the distance from the obstacle increases,until the signal ceases entirely.

• Remains constant if the distance between vehicle andobstacle remains unchanged; if this situation con-cerns the side sensors, the signal will stop afterapproximately 3 seconds, for example, in the event ofmanoeuvres along a wall.

If several obstacles are detected by the sensors, only thenearest one is considered.

Indications On Display — If Equipped

When the sensors are activated, the parking sensordisplay screen appears in the instrument cluster.

Parking Sensors


Obstacle presence and distance information is thereforeprovided both by the acoustic signal and the instrumentcluster display.

The system indicates a detected obstacle by displayingan arc in one or more positions according to the distanceof the obstacle and its position in relation to the vehicle.

If an obstacle is detected in the rear central area, theinstrument cluster display shows all the arcs in the rearcentral area, up to the one that corresponds to theposition of the obstacle itself.

The signal is similar for obstacles in the rear left or rightarea.

The arc that corresponds to the position of the obstaclewill flash.

The color on the instrument cluster display depends onthe distance from and position of the obstacle.

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrumentcluster display shows a single constant arc and emits acontinuous sound.

If there are several obstacles, the closest one is indi-cated.

Fault Indication

Parking sensor failures, if any, will be indicated whenREVERSE gear is engaged by the switching on of the

warning light in the instrument cluster display.

General Warnings

When parking, take the utmost care over obstacles thatmay be above or under the sensor.

Under certain circumstances, objects close to the vehicleare not detected by the system and could thereforecause damage to the vehicle or be damaged themselves.

Parking Sensor Display Screen

3


Some conditions may influence the performance of theparking sensors:

• The presence of ice, snow, mud or multiple layers ofpaint on the sensor surface may cause reducedsensitivity of the sensor itself and therefore reducethe system performance.

• Mechanical interference (e.g washing the vehicle,rain, strong wind, hail) may cause the sensor todetect a non-existent obstacle (“echo interference”).

• The presence of ultrasonic systems (e.g. pneumaticbrake systems of trucks or pneumatic drills) near thevehicle could alter the signals sent by the sensor.

• The variation in sensor position, caused by variationin ride (due to suspension component wear), chang-ing tires, overloaded vehicle, or tuning that lowersthe vehicle, for example, may affect parking sensorsystem performance.

NOTE: The sensor must be free from mud, dirt snow orice in order for the system to operate correctly. Becareful not to scratch or damage the sensors whilecleaning them. Avoid using dry, rough or hard cloths.The sensors must be washed using clean water, with theaddition of car shampoo if necessary. When usingspecial washing equipment such as high pressure jets orsteam cleaning, clean the sensors very quickly keepingthe jet more than 4 in (10 cm) away. Also, do not applystickers to the sensors.

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up evenwhen using the Parking Sensor system. Alwayscheck carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure tocheck for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-structions, or blind spots before backing up. Youare responsible for the safety of your surroundingsand must continue to pay attention while backingup. Failure to do so can result in serious injury ordeath.


CAUTION!

• The Parking Sensor system is only a parking aidand it is unable to recognize every obstacle,including small obstacles. Parking curbs might betemporarily detected or not detected at all. Ob-stacles located above or below the sensors willnot be detected when they are in close proximity

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when usingthe Parking Sensor system in order to be able tostop in time when an obstacle is detected. It isrecommended that the driver looks over his/hershoulder when using the Parking Sensor system.

POWER OUTLETS

Your vehicle is equipped with a 12 Volt (13 Amp) poweroutlet that can be used to power cellular phones, smallelectronics and other low powered electrical accesso-ries.

The power outlet is located on the central tunnel,between the two cup holders. It only operates with theignition key at MAR/ON.

Front Power Outlet

3


WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:• Only devices designed for use in this type of

outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.• Do not touch with wet hands.• Close the lid when not in use and while driving

the vehicle.• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an

electric shock and failure.

CAUTION!

• Many accessories that can be plugged in drawpower from the vehicle’s battery, even when notin use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, ifplugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery willdischarge sufficiently to degrade battery lifeand/or prevent the engine from starting.

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade thebattery even more quickly. Only use these inter-mittently and with greater caution.

• After the use of high power draw accessories, orlong periods of the vehicle not being started (withaccessories still plugged in), the vehicle must bedriven a sufficient length of time to allow thegenerator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

CAUTION!

• Do not exceed the maximum power of 180 Watts(15 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 180 Watts (15 Amps)power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting thesystem will need to be replaced.

(Continued)

Power Outlet Fuse Location


CAUTION! (Continued)• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs

only. Do not insert any other object in the poweroutlets as this will damage the outlet and blowthe fuse. Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your New VehicleLimited Warranty.

CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER —IF EQUIPPED

The cigar lighter and ash receiver are located on thecentral tunnel. To activate the cigar lighter, push thebutton down. After a few seconds the button automati-cally returns to its initial position, and the cigar lighteris ready for use.

NOTE:

• Always check that the cigar lighter is switched off.

• Do not connect devices with power higher than180 W to the socket.

• Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable adap-tors.

CUPHOLDER

A cupholder is located in the rear of the center console.

Center Console Cupholder

3


STORAGE

Seatback Storage

Located in the back of both the driver and passengerfront seats are pockets that can be used for storage.

Console Features

There is a cargo pouch storage area located between thedriver and passengers seat.

Rear Compartment Storage

CAUTION!

• To prevent possible damage, do not slam thedecklid to close it. Use a firm downward push atthe center of the decklid to ensure the decklidlatch is fully engaged.

(Continued)

Drivers Side Seatback Storage

Cargo Pouch Storage Location


CAUTION! (Continued)• During normal vehicle operation, the luggage

compartment (located rear of the engine) canreach temperatures above 149 °F (65 °C). Do nottransport objects in the luggage compartment thatmay be damaged at such temperatures. Do notplace aerosol cans in the luggage compartment.

Your vehicle is equipped with a storage area locatedunder the decklid.

WARNING!

Do not allow children to have access to rear storagecompartment. Always close the hood when yourvehicle is unattended. Once in the rear storagecompartment, young children may not be able toescape. If trapped in the rear compartment, childrencan die from suffocation or heat stroke.

As a security measure, an internal decklid emergencyrelease lever is built into the rear compartment storagelatching mechanism. In a event of a person trappedinside the storage compartment, the decklid can besimply opened by pulling on the phosphorescenthandle attached to the decklid latching mechanism.

Decklid Emergency Release

3


WARNING!

• The maximum load limit for the luggage compart-ment (located rear of the engine), in addition tothe kits provided, is 33 lbs. (15kg). Do not exceedthe maximum permitted load in the luggage com-partment. When accessing the rear luggage com-partment, do not come into contact with engine,or other components, that may be hot and couldburn you if touched.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Access the luggage compartment only with the

vehicle stationary. Before exiting the vehicle, youshould always place the vehicle into FIRST gearor REVERSE, apply the parking brake, and re-move the key from the ignition. Never leave thekey fob in the vehicle or in a location accessible tochildren.


• The decklid must always be closed properly, andthe lock engaged, while the vehicle is in motions.

Rear Compartment Light


UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS� INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .96

� INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

� WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . .99

▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . .106

▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . .113

▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . .115

▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .115

� INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . .116

▫ Instrument Cluster Display Setup Menu . . . .117

▫ Change Engine Oil Indicator System . . . . . .125

▫ Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

▫ Values Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

� CYBERSECURITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

� RADIO SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

� RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .130

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

� CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

▫ Climate Controls Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

4

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Climate Control Air Outlets 6 — Switch Bank (A/C/Door Lock Switch/Door MirrorDemisting)

2 — Multifunction Lever 7 — Climate Controls3 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Driver Air Bag4 — Washer/Wiper Lever 9 — Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons5 — Passenger Air Bag

96 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1. Temperature Gauge• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-

perature. Any reading within the normal rangeindicates that the engine cooling system is operat-ing satisfactorily.

• The digital gauge will likely indicate a highertemperature when driving in hot weather, or upmountain grades. It should not be allowed toexceed the upper limits of the normal operatingrange.

4

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97

NOTE: Driving with a hot engine cooling system coulddamage your vehicle. The digital warning light mayswitch on (together with a message on the display) toindicate that the coolant temperature is too high; in thiscase, stop the engine and contact a dedicated autho-rized dealership.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You orothers could be badly burned by steam or boilingcoolant. You may want to call an authorized dealerfor service if your vehicle overheats. If you decideto look under the hood yourself, see “MaintainingYour Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under the Cool-ing System Pressure Cap paragraph.

2. Tachometer• This gauge measures engine revolutions per min-

ute (RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the redarea, ease up on the accelerator to prevent enginedamage.

3. Speedometer• Indicates vehicle speed.

4. Fuel Gauge• The digital display shows the amount of fuel in the

tank.• The switching on of the digital warning light

indicates that 1 – 1.3 gallons of fuel are left in thetank; in this situation, refuel as soon as possible.

• Do not travel with the fuel tank almost empty; anygaps in fuel delivery could damage the catalyticconverter.

• The fuel pump symbol points to the side ofthe vehicle where the fuel door is located.

5. “Alfa DNA” Driving Mode Indicator• This area of the cluster displays which driving

mode the vehicle is currently in. A letter (d, n, or a)corresponding to the active driving mode (dynamicor race, natural, all weather) and a dedicated mes-sage is shown on the display.


WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

The warning/indicator lights switch on in the instru-ment panel together with a dedicated message and/oracoustic signal when applicable. These indications areindicative and precautionary and as such must not beconsidered as exhaustive and/or alternative to theinformation contained in the Owner’s Manual, which

you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Alwaysrefer to the information in this chapter in the event of afailure indication.

All active telltales will display first if applicable. Thesystem check menu may appear different based uponequipment options and current vehicle status. Sometelltales are optional and may not appear.

Red Telltale Indicator Lights

Brake Warning Light

Red TelltaleLight

What It Means

United States

Canada

Brake Warning LightThis light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brakeapplication. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, thatthe brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-voir.If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level isat the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic sys-tem malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the lightwill remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake

4


Red TelltaleLight

What It Means

Booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation maybe felt during each stop.

NOTE: Brake Warning Light may illuminate due to excessive wear to brake pads.

The dual brake system provides a reserve brakingcapacity in the event of a failure to a portion of thehydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brakesystem is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, whichwill turn on when the brake fluid level in the mastercylinder has dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharpcornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-tions. The vehicle should have service performed, andthe brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-sary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on isdangerous. Part of the brake system may havefailed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. Youcould have a collision. Have the vehicle checkedimmediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake ForceDistribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, theBrake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABSLight. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checkedby placing the ignition in the MAR/ON/RUN position.The light should illuminate for approximately twoseconds. The light should then turn off unless the


parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. Ifthe light does not illuminate, have the light inspected byan authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake isapplied with the ignition placed in the MAR/ON/RUNposition.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake isapplied. It does not show the degree of brake applica-tion.

Oil Pressure Warning Light

Red TelltaleLight

What It Means

Oil Pressure Warning LightThis light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the ve-hicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turnson.Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate howmuch oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

4


Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

Red TelltaleLight

What It Means

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning LightThis light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If aproblem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash de-pending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely andcompletely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light shouldturn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be driv-able; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required andyou may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and yourvehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first placed in theMAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does notcome on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.



Red TelltaleLight

What It Means

Air Bag Warning LightThis light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placedin the MAR/ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, orturns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as pos-sible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag WarningLight has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on inter-mittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle imme-diately.

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

Red TelltaleLight

What It Means

Seat Belt Reminder Warning LightWhen the ignition is first placed in the MAR/ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt isunbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver orfront passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or re-main on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things ToKnow Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

4


Transmission Fault Warning Light

Red TelltaleLight

What It Means

Transmission Fault Warning LightThis light will illuminate (together with a message in the instrument cluster display and abuzzer) to indicate a transmission fault. Contact your authorized dealer if the message re-mains after restarting the engine.

WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle when theTransmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come incontact with hot engine or exhaust components andcause a fire.

CAUTION!

Continuous driving with the Transmission Tem-perature Warning Light illuminated will eventuallycause severe transmission damage or transmissionfailure.


Battery Charge Warning Light

Red TelltaleLight

What It Means

Battery Charge Warning LightThis light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the en-gine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your autho-rized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical systemor a related component.

Engine Temperature Warning Light

Red WarningLight

What It Means

Engine Temperature Warning LightThis light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise andthe gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound afterreaching a set threshold.If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C systemis on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the tem-perature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for ser-vice. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in �What To Do In Emergencies” for further infor-mation.

4


Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)Warning Light

Yellow TelltaleLight

What It Means

Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator LightThe warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressureis lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In thesecases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show theindications corresponding to each tire in sequence.

CAUTION!

Do not continue driving with one or more flat tiresas handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair imme-diately using the dedicated tire repair kit and con-tact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should bechecked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If

your vehicle has tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-sure label, you should determine the proper tire infla-tion pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltalewhen one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire


causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for propertire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflationhas not reached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with thelow tire pressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approximatelyone minute and then remain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehiclestart-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When themalfunction indicator is illuminated, the system maynot be able to detect or signal low tire pressure asintended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to function properly.

NOTE: Some external parameters (eg; outdoor tem-perature) may affect TPMS info on your instrumentcluster.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the originalequipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures andwarning have been established for the tire sizeequipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-eration or sensor damage may result when usingreplacement equipment that is not of the same size,type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can causesensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants maycause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-market tire sealant it is recommended that you takeyour vehicle to an authorized dealer to have yoursensor function checked.

4


Generic Warning Indicator Light


What It Means

Generic Warning Indicator LightThe Generic Warning Light will illuminate if any of the following conditions occur: OilChange Request, Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Failure, External Light Failure, Fuel Cut-OffNot Available, Parking Sensor Failure, DST System Failure.

Passenger Air Bag Indicator Light


What It Means

Passenger Air Bag Indicator LightThis light should come and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when theignition is first turned to the AVV/START or MAR/ON/RUN position. If the light stays on,or comes on while driving it may indicate a problem with a passenger air bag system, if thelight flickers it may indicate an air bag warning bag failure. Have an authorized dealer ser-vice the air bag system immediately.


Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light


What It Means

Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator LightAfter the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indi-cate function check at vehicle startup. If the light remains on after startup or comes on andstays on at road speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has be-come inoperative. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes.If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on, see an authorizeddealer immediately. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting And Operating” for fur-ther information.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped


What It Means

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If EquippedThis light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.

4


Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped


What It Means

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If EquippedThe “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition isplaced in the MAR/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out withthe engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the enginerunning, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on afterseveral ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speedsgreater than 30 MPH (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have theproblem diagnosed and corrected.• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily

each time the ignition is placed in the MAR/ON/RUN position.• Each time the ignition is turned to MAR/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even

if it was turned off previously.• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;

the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.


Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)


What It Means

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard DiagnosticSystem called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. Thelight will illuminate when the ignition is in the MAR/ON/RUN position before engine start.If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from STOP/OFF/LOCK to MAR/ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminatethe light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev-eral typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will notrequire towing.When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead toimmediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be ser-viced as soon as possible if this occurs.

WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referencedabove, can reach higher temperatures than in nor-mal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)you drive slowly or park over flammable sub-stances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc.This could result in death or serious injury to thedriver, occupants or others.

4


CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction IndicatorLight (MIL) on could cause damage to the enginecontrol system. It also could affect fuel economyand driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severecatalytic converter damage and power loss will soonoccur. Immediate service is required.

Service Warning Indicator Light – If Equipped


What It Means

Service Warning Indicator LightThe “Scheduled Servicing Plan” includes vehicle maintenance at fixed intervals, refer to�Maintenance Schedules”. This message is displayed automatically along with the warninglight when the key is turned to MAR/ON/RUN - 1242 miles (2,000 km) before these dead-lines and reappears every 124 miles (200 km). Below 124 miles (200 km) servicing indica-tions are more frequent. The indication will appear in miles or kilometers according to the�Unit Of Measurement� settings. When the next scheduled service is approaching and thekey is turned to MAR/ON/RUN, the word Service will appear on the display, followed bythe number of miles or kilometers left. Contact a dedicated authorized dealership. The op-erations in the “Scheduled Servicing Plan” will be performed and the message will be reset.


Green Telltale Indicator Lights

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

Green TelltaleLight

What It Means

Turn Signal Indicator LightsThe instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the left or right turnsignal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selectedwhen the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right).

NOTE:• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with

either turn signal on.• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped

Green TelltaleLight

What It Means

Front Fog Indicator Light — If EquippedThis indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

4


Park/Headlight On Indicator Light

Green TelltaleLight

What It Means

Park/Headlight On Indicator LightThis indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.

Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light — If Equipped

Green TelltaleLight

What It Means

Cruise Control Engaged Indicator LightThis light will turn on when the cruise control has been set to a certain speed.

Door Mirror Defrost Indicator Light

Green TelltaleLight

What It Means

Door Mirror Defrost Indicator LightThis indicator will illuminate when the Door Mirror Defrost button on the instrument panelis pushed to the ON position.


White Telltale Indicator Lights

Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light

White TelltaleLight

What It Means

Cruise Control Ready Indicator LightThis light will turn on when the speed control is on, but not set.

Blue Telltale Indicator Lights

High Beam Indicator Light

Blue TelltaleLight

What It Means

High Beam Indicator LightThis indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction controllever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you toswitch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary highbeam on, �flash to pass� scenario.

4


INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY

Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument clusterdisplay, which offers useful information to the driver.With the ignition in the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position(and the key removed, for vehicles with mechanicalkey), opening/closing of a door will activate the displayfor viewing, and display the total miles or kilometers inthe odometer. Your instrument cluster display is de-signed to display important information about yourvehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver interac-tive display located on the instrument panel, yourinstrument cluster display can show you how systemsare working and give you warnings when they aren’t.The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scrollthrough and enter the main menus and submenus. Youcan access the specific information you want and makeselections and adjustments.

The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrumentcluster.

The instrument cluster display consists of the following:

• Digital Speedometer

• Vehicle Info

• Fuel Economy Info

• Trip Info

• Screen Setup

• Vehicle Settings

Instrument Cluster Display


The system allows the driver to select information bypushing the following buttons mounted on the instru-ment panel to the left of the steering column:

• UP Arrow Button

Push and release the up arrow button to scrollupward through the main menu and sub-menus or to increase the displayed value.Outside of the menu, the up arrow will adjust

the brightness of the instrument panel.

• DOWN Arrow Button

Push and release the down arrow button toscroll downward through the main menu andsubmenus or to decrease the displayed value.Outside of the menu, the down arrow will

adjust the brightness of the instrument panel.

• SET/BACK Arrow Button

Push and release the SET/BACK arrow button toaccess/select the information screens or submenuscreens of a main menu item. Push and hold theSET/BACK arrow button to return to the main menufrom an info screen or submenu item.

Instrument Cluster Display Setup Menu

The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in acycle. Push the up and down arrow buttons to accessthe different options and settings (setup).

The setup menu can be activated by pushing theSET/BACK button. Single push on the up or downarrow button will scroll through the setup menu op-tions. The menu includes the following functions:

• Menu

• Speed Buzzer

Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons

4


• Trip B/Data

• Set Time

• Set Date

• Autoclose

• Units

• Language

• Buzzer Volume

• Service

• Daylights (D.R.L.) – If Equipped

• Exit Menu

Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu WithoutSubmenu

1. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to select the mainmenu option to set.

2. Push the up or down arrow button (by a single push)to select the new setting.

3. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to store the newsetting and go back to the main menu option previ-ously selected.

Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Sub-menu

1. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to display thefirst submenu option.

2. Push the up or down arrow button (by a single push)to scroll through all the submenu options.

3. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to select thedisplayed submenu option and to open the relevantsetup menu.

4. Push the up or down arrow button (by a single push)to select the new setting for this submenu option.

5. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to store the newsetting and go back to the previously selected sub-menu option.

6. Push and hold the SET/BACK button to return to themain menu (short hold) or the main screen (longerhold).

Speed Buzzer (Speed Limit)

With this function, it is possible to set the vehicle speedlimit (MPH or km/h) to immediately alert the driverwhen the set limit is exceeded.


To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:

1. Briefly push the SET/BACK button. The display willshow the message (Speed Buzzer).

2. Push and release the up or down arrow button toselect speed limit activation (On) or deactivation(Off).

3. When the function is activated (On), briefly push theSET/BACK button to display the previously setspeed. Pushing the up or down arrow buttons selectsthe speed limit. Push SET/BACK to confirm selec-tion.

NOTE: The setting can be increased or decreased by5 MPH or km/h each time the up or down arrow buttonis pushed for speed settings above 20 MPH (32 km/h).To increase or decrease the set speed rapidly, push andhold the up or down arrow button. Save the setting bybriefly pushing the button when you approach therequired setting.

Briefly push the SET/BACK button to go back to themenu screen, or push and hold the SET/BACK button(approximately one second) to go back to the mainscreen without storing the settings.

To cancel the setting, proceed as follows:

1. Briefly push the SET/BACK button. “On” will dis-play.

2. Push and release the down button. “Off” will dis-play.

3. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to go back to themenu screen, or push and hold the SET/BACKbutton (approximately one second) to go back to themain screen without storing the settings.

Trip B Activation

Through this option, it is possible to activate (On) ordeactivate (Off) the Trip B (partial trip) display.

For further information, see “Trip Computer.”

For activation/deactivation, proceed as follows:

1. Briefly push the SET/BACK button. “On” or “Off”will display in the instrument cluster display (ac-cording to previous setting).

2. Push and release the up or down arrow button toselect the setting and once selected a beep will occurto signal the setting is saved.

4



Set Time

This function may be used to set the clock through twosubmenu items: “Time” and “Mode.”

Proceed as follows:

1. Briefly push the SET/BACK button. The display willshow the two submenu items “Time” and “Mode.”

2. Push and release the up or down arrow button tonavigate the two submenu items.

3. Select the required option and then push the SET/BACK button.

4. When accessing the “Time” submenu item, brieflypush the SET/BACK button and “hours” will flashon the display.

5. Push and release the up or down arrow button forsetting.

6. Briefly push the SET/BACK button and “minutes”will flash on the display.


NOTE:

• The setting will increase or decrease by one uniteach time the up or down arrow button is pushed.Push and hold the button to increase/decrease thesetting rapidly. Save the setting by briefly pushingthe button when you approach the required setting.

• Briefly push the SET/BACK button to return to the“Time” sub-function.

• When accessing the “Mode” submenu, briefly pushthe SET/BACK button. The previously set displayformat will flash on the display.

• Push and release the up or down arrow button toselect “24h” or “12h.”

When you have selected the required settings, brieflypush the SET/BACK button to go back to the Time,Mode submenu screen, or push and hold the SET/BACK button (approximately one second) to go back tothe main screen without storing the settings.


Set Date

This function may be used to set the date (day - month- year).

To change the date, proceed as follows:

1. Briefly push the SET/BACK button and “year” willflash on the display.


3. Briefly push the SET/BACK button and “month”will flash on the display.


5. Briefly push the SET/BACK button and “day” willflash on the display.

6. Push and release the up or down button for setting.

NOTE: The setting will increase or decrease by oneunit each time the up or down arrow button is pushed.Push and hold the up or down arrow button toincrease/decrease the setting rapidly. Save the settingby briefly pushing the button when you approach therequired setting.

Briefly push the SET/BACK button to go back to themenu screen, or push and hold the SET/BACK button(approximately one second) to go back to the mainscreen without storing the settings.

Autoclose

With this function active, the doors will automaticallylock at when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 12 MPH(20 km/h).

To change the setting, proceed as follows:

1. Briefly push the SET/BACK button “On” or “Off”will flash on the display (according to the previoussetting).



Units (Set Units)

This function may be used to set the measurement unitin three submenus: “Distance,” “Temperature” and“Fuel Economy.”

4


To set the required unit, proceed as follows:

1. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to display thethree submenus.

2. Push and release the up or down arrow button tonavigate the three submenus.

3. Select the required submenu and then briefly pushthe SET/BACK button.

4. When accessing the “Distance” submenu, brieflypush the SET/BACK button. Either “mi” or “km”will appear on the display (according to the previoussetting).


6. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to return to thesubmenu.

7. When accessing the “Fuel Economy” submenu,briefly push the SET/BACK button. Either “mpg,”“km/l ” or “l/100km” will appear on the display(according to the previous setting).

If the distance unit set is “mi,” the fuel economy unitwill be displayed in “mpg.”

If the distance unit set is “km,” the fuel economy unitwill be displayed in either km/l or l/100km.



3. When accessing the “Temperature” submenu, brieflypush the SET/BACK button. Either “°F” or “°C” willappear on the display (according to the previoussetting).



When you have made the required settings, brieflypush the SET/BACK button to go back to the submenuscreen, or push and hold the SET/BACK button (ap-proximately one second) to go back to the main screenwithout storing the settings.


Language (Selecting The Language)

The messages can be displayed in the following lan-guages: Italian, English (USA), German, Portuguese,Spanish, French, Chinese, Russian, and Mexican Span-ish.

To set the required language, proceed as follows:

1. Briefly push the SET/BACK button. The previouslyset “language” will flash on the display.



Buzzer Volume (Adjusting The Failure/WarningBuzzer Volume)

With this function, the volume of the buzzer accompa-nying any failure/warning indication can be adjustedto one of eight volume levels.

To adjust the volume, proceed as follows:

1. Briefly push the SET/BACK button. The previouslyset volume “level” will flash on the display.



Service (Scheduled Servicing) — If Equipped

With this function, it is possible to viewinformation on mileage intervals for servic-ing.

To obtain this information, proceed as follows:

Push the SET/BACK button briefly. The display showsthe service interval in miles (mi) or kilometers (km)according to the previous setting (see the �Unit OfMeasurement� paragraph).

Briefly push the SET/BACK button to go back to themenu screen or hold the button down to go back to thestandard screen.

4


NOTE: The “Scheduled Servicing Plan” includes ve-hicle maintenance at fixed intervals, refer to �Mainte-nance Schedules�. This message is displayed automati-cally along with the warning light when the key isturned to MAR/ON/RUN - 1242 miles (2,000 km)before these deadlines and reappears every 124 miles(200 km). Below 124 miles (200 km) servicing indica-tions are more frequent. The indication will appear inmiles or kilometers according to the �Unit Of Measure-ment� settings. When the next scheduled service isapproaching and the key is turned to MAR/ON/RUN,the word Service will appear on the display, followedby the number of miles or kilometers left. Contact anauthorized dealer. The operations in the “ScheduledServicing Plan” will be performed and the message willbe reset.

Daytime Running Lamps

This function may be used to activate/deactivate thedaytime running lamps.

Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off:

1. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to display thethree submenus.

2. Briefly push the SET/BACK button. “On” or “Off”will flash on the display (according to previoussetting).


4. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to go back to themenu screen, or push and hold the button (approxi-mately one second) to go back to the main screenwithout storing the settings.

Exit Menu

This function closes the initial menu screen.

Briefly push the SET/BACK button to go back to themain screen.

Push and release the up arrow button to return to thefirst menu option (Speed Buzzer).

Push and release the down arrow button to return to thelast menu option (Daylights).


Change Engine Oil Indicator System

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oilchange indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil”message will flash in the instrument cluster display forapproximately ten seconds and the oil pressure warninglight will illuminate. The “Change Engine Oil” messagein the instrument cluster display and the oil pressurewarning light will turn off after approximately tenseconds.

Reset of the Oil Change Reminder message as fol-lows:

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, cycle the ignitionto the MAR/RUN position (do not start the engine).

2. Push and hold the accelerator pedal.

3. Push and release the brake pedal six times; with aone second pause between each push of the brakepedal.

4. After the 6th release of the brake pedal, pause onesecond and then release the accelerator pedal.

NOTE: Consult your authorized dealer if the oil changeindicator message does not reset.

Trip Computer

The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster.It features a driver-interactive display (displays infor-mation such as trip information, range, fuel consump-tion, average speed, and travel time).

Trip Button

The TRIP button, located on the right steering columnstalk, can be used to display and to reset the trip values.

• A short button push displays the different values.

• A long button push resets the system and then startsa new trip.

Trip Button

4


Trip Functions

Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of newtrip).

“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:

• Range

• Average Fuel Consumption

• Travel Distance

• Current Fuel Consumption

• Average Speed

• Travel Time

“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to:

• Average Fuel Consumption

• Travel Distance

• Average Speed

• Travel Time

“Current Trip” can be used to display the figuresrelating to:

NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “TripB Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous Fuel Consump-tion” cannot be reset.

New Trip

To reset:

• Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the systemmanually.

• When the “Trip distance” reaches 99999.9 kilometers(621370 miles) or when the “Travel time” reaches99.59 (99 hours and 59 minutes), the system is resetautomatically.

• Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets thesystem.

NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence ofthe screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only theinformation associated with Trip A or Trip B functionswill be reset.


Start Of Trip Procedure

With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP button forover two seconds to reset trip information.

Exit Trip

To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values havebeen displayed or hold the MENU button for longerthan one second.

Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back tothe menu screen or push and hold the MENU (approxi-mately one second) to go back to the main screenwithout storing settings.

Values Displayed

Indications On Display

Each time a value is selected, the following informationis shown in the Instrument Cluster Display:

• “Trip A” or “Trip B” location(s)

• Name, value and unit of measure of the selectedvalue (e.g. �Range 520 mi�).

After a few seconds, the name of the selected value isreplaced by the corresponding icon.

Range

This indicates the distance which may be traveled withthe fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that drivingconditions will not change. The message “----” willappear on the display in the following cases:

• Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).

• The vehicle is parked for a long time with the enginerunning.

4


NOTE: The range depends on several factors: drivingstyle, type of route (freeway, residential, mountainroads, etc.), conditions of use of the vehicle (load, tirepressure, etc.). Trip planning must take into account theabove notes.

Average Fuel Consumption

This value shows the approximate average consump-tion since the last reset.

Travel Distance

This value shows the distance covered since the lastreset.

Current Fuel Consumption

This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is con-stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on thedisplay if the vehicle is parked with the engine running.

Average Speed

This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as afunction of the overall time elapsed since the last reset.

Travel Time

This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.

Tire Pressure Values

This screen will display OK at each Tire PressureMonitoring sensor. Refer to “Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem” in “Starting And Operating.”

CYBERSECURITY

Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may beequipped with both wired and wireless networks.These networks allow your vehicle to send and receiveinformation. This information allows systems and fea-tures in your vehicle to function properly.

Your vehicle may be equipped with certain securityfeatures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlaw-ful access to vehicle systems and wireless communica-tions. Vehicle software technology continues to evolveover time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Simi-lar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle mayrequire software updates to improve the usability andperformance of your systems or to reduce the potentialrisk of unauthorized and unlawful access to yourvehicle systems.


The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to yourvehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recentversion of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software)is installed.

WARNING!

• It is not possible to know or to predict all of thepossible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems arebreached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,including safety related systems, could be im-paired or a loss of vehicle control could occur thatmay result in an accident involving serious injuryor death.

• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD)into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source.Media of unknown origin could possibly containmalicious software, and if installed in your ve-hicle, it may increase the possibility for vehiclesystems to be breached.

• As always, if you experience unusual vehiclebehavior, take your vehicle to your nearest autho-rized dealer immediately.

NOTE:

• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regard-ing software updates.

• To help further improve vehicle security and mini-mize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicleowners should:• Routinely check

www.driveuconnect.com/software-updateto learn about available Uconnect software updates.

• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).

Privacy of any wireless and wired communicationscannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully inter-cept information and private communications withoutyour consent. For further information, refer to “On-board Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in“Maintaining Your Vehicle”.

4


www.driveuconnect.com/software-update

RADIO SYSTEM

The radio system consists of:

• Supply cables for radio, speakers and aerial

• Radio

• Antenna located on the inside of the front fascia

• Two tweeter speakers with 6 inch (38 mm) diameterand two mid-woofer speakers with 20 inch (130 mm)diameter, fitted on the doors

NOTE: Be sure to press the RESET button when usingthe unit for the first time, after changing the vehiclebattery, or using the battery disconnect (anytime thevehicle loses power).

For further information on radio functions and use,refer to the Alpine Radio Supplement.

RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES

Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on inyour vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performancefrom your radio. This condition may be lessened oreliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna.This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radioperformance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repo-sitioning of the antenna, it is recommended that theradio volume be turned down or off during mobilephone operation.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules andRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing conditions:

• Changes or modifications not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equipment.

• This device may not cause harmful interference.

• This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesired op-eration.


CLIMATE CONTROLS

The Climate Control System allows you to regulate thetemperature, air flow, and direction of air circulatingthroughout the vehicle. The controls are located on theinstrument panel below the radio.

Climate Controls Overview

Climate Controls

4


Climate Control Descriptions

Icon DescriptionA/C ButtonPress and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on.Performing this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual modeand the A/C indicator will turn off.MAX A/CFor maximum cooling, use the A/C and recirculation modes at the same time.ECONOMY MODEIf economy mode is desired, press the A/C switch to turn off the A/C compressor. Then,rotate the temperature control to the desired temperature.Recirculation And Out Side Air KnobSlide this knob over to one of the two settings to change the system between recirculationmode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such assmoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.

NOTE:• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window

fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog

on the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air posi-tion for maximum defogging.

• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.


Icon DescriptionDemist/Defrost ButtonPush and release the Demist/Defrost button to turn on the outside mirror defroster. Anindicator will illuminate when the outside mirror defroster is on. The outside mirror de-froster automatically turns off after 20 minutes.Temperature Control KnobTemperature control is used to regulate the temperature of the air forced through the cli-mate system. The temperature can be selected using the temperature control knob on thefaceplate. The temperature increases as you turn the temperature control knob clockwise.The temperature decreases as you turn the temperature control knob counterclockwise.Blower Control KnobBlower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. Thespeeds can be selected by rotating the blower control knob on the faceplate clockwise, orcounterclockwise. The larger the number of the setting, the faster the blower speed.Mode Control KnobMode control is used to regulate the mode airflow is distributed into the cabin. The airflowdistribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, flooroutlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.

Panel Mode Panel ModeAir comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard out-lets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is ashut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow fromthese outlets.

4


Icon DescriptionBi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air isdirected through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

NOTE:BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of thepanel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

Floor Mode Floor ModeAir comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost andside window demister outlets.

Mix Mode Mix ModeAir is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This settingworks best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This set-ting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Front Defrost ModeAir comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost mode isselected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature set-tings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.


Climate Control Functions

Heating

To heat the passenger compartment, proceed as follows:

1. Rotate the Temperature Control to the red section.

2. Turn the Blower Control to the desired speed.

3. Turn the Mode Control to .

4. Then operate the controls to maintain the desiredcomfort conditions.

NOTE:

• This air distribution allows the passenger compart-ment to be heated quickly.

• When the engine is cold, it takes a few minutes toachieve optimum passenger compartment heating.

Fast Demisting/Defrosting Of Windshield AndSide Windows

Proceed as follows:


2. Turn the Blower Control to 4 (maximum fan speed).


4. Move the Recirculation Control to .

After demisting/defrosting, operate the controls asnormal to restore the required comfort conditions.

NOTE: The climate control system is very useful forspeeding up and maintaining demisting since it dehu-midifies the air. Adjust the controls as described previ-ously and switch on the climate control system bypressing the A/C button.

Window Demisting

In the event of considerable external moisture and/orrain and/or large differences in temperature inside andoutside the passenger compartment, perform the fol-lowing preventive window demisting procedure:



3. Turn the Blower Control to 2 (intermediate fanspeed).

4. Turn the Mode Control to with the possibilityof moving it to position if window misting doesnot occur.

4


Ventilation

To ventilate the passenger compartment properly, pro-ceed as follows:

1. Fully open the vents and direct them appropriately.

2. Rotate the Temperature Control to the blue section.


4. Turn the Blower Control to the desired speed.


Internal Air Recirculation Activation

• Move the Recirculation Control to .

It is advisable to switch the internal air recirculation onwhile standing in queues or in tunnels to prevent theintroduction of polluted air.

Do not use the function for a long time, particularly ifthere are two people on board, to prevent the windowsfrom misting.

NOTE: The internal air recirculation system makes itpossible to reach the required heating or ventilationconditions more quickly. Do not use the internal airrecirculation function on rainy/cold days to avoid thepossibility of the windows misting.

Climate Control

Proceed as follows:

1. Rotate the Temperature Control to the blue section.

2. Turn the Blower Control to 1 (1st fan speed). Forrapid cooling, turn Blower Control to 4 (maximumfan speed).



5. Press the A/C button.


Cooling Adjustment

Proceed as follows:


2. Rotate the Temperature Control towards the redsection to increase the temperature.

3. Turn the Blower Control counterclockwise to reducethe fan speed.

Door Mirror Demisting

• Press the button to activate this function.

• Press the button again to deactivate the func-tion.

Activation is indicated by the digital warning light onthe display.

Demist/Defrost Button

4


System Maintenance

In winter, the climate control system must be turned onat least once a month for about 10 minutes. Have thesystem inspected at an authorized dealer before thesummer.

NOTE: The system uses R-1234yf coolant which doesnot pollute the environment in the event of accidentalleakage. Under no circumstances should you use R-134afluid which, in addition to being incompatible with thesystem’s components, contributes greatly to the green-house effect.


STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS� STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

▫ Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

▫ Turbo Charger “Cool Down” . . . . . . . . . . . .143

� SIX-SPEED ALFA TWIN CLUTCHTRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

▫ Using The Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

� ALFA DNA SYSTEM (DYNAMIC VEHICLECONTROL SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

▫ Driving Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

▫ System Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

▫ Launch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

� DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . .154

▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

� DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . .155

▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

� PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

� BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

� ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL)SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

▫ System Intervention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

▫ Electronic Brake Distribution System (EBD) . .160

▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . .160

5

▫ Cornering Brake Control System (CBC) . . . . .161

▫ Drag Torque Control System (DTC) . . . . . . .161

▫ AntiSlip Regulation System (ASR) . . . . . . . .162

▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

▫ Hydraulic Brake Assistant System (HBA) . . .164

▫ Electronic Q2 System (E-Q2) . . . . . . . . . . . .164

▫ Ready Alert Brake System (RAB) . . . . . . . . .164

� TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . .165

▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . .168

▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . .169

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . .169

� TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . .174

▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . .176

▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .178

▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

� TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . .184

� TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .185

� DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATIONUNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . .185

▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186

▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186

▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186

� TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187

▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

140 STARTING AND OPERATING

� FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1750 TURBO . . . . .191

▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . .192

▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . .192

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192

▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193

▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . .194

� ADDING FUEL/SMART FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . .194

� TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

� RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHINDMOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

▫ Towing This Vehicle BehindAnother Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

5

STARTING AND OPERATING 141

STARTING PROCEDURES

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjustboth inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seatbelts.

WARNING!

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or withaccess to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended isdangerous for a number of reasons. A child or otherscould be seriously or fatally injured. Childrenshould be warned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (orin a location accessible to children). A child couldoperate power windows, other controls, or movethe vehicle.

Automatic Transmission

To start the engine, press the brake pedal. The systemengages NEUTRAL (N) automatically.

After the starting procedure, FIRST (1st) gear or RE-VERSE (R) can be engaged.

Irrespective of the mode selected (AUTO/MANUAL),to engage FIRST (1st) gear or REVERSE (R), it isnecessary to press the brake pedal and push the 1button on the transmission control panel (or the �+�steering wheel stalk) to engage FIRST (1st) gear or the Rbutton to engage REVERSE (R).

When FIRST (1st) gear is engaged, the system sets itselfto AUTO mode.

NEUTRAL (N) can be engaged again by pushing the Nbutton with the brake pedal pressed.

When the 1, N, or R buttons are pushed (or �+� steeringwheel stalk is operated) without pressing the brakepedal, no gear change request is implemented by thesystem.

NOTE: REVERSE (R) cannot be engaged by pushing the�-� stalk on the steering wheel.

Normal Starting

NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warmengine is obtained without pumping or pressing theaccelerator pedal.

Turn the ignition switch to the AVV/ACC (START)position and release it when the engine starts. If the


engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignitionswitch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

Cold Weather Operation

Your engine is designed to operate at temperatures aslow as 0°F (-18°C).

CAUTION!

Use of the recommended SAE 5W-40 Synthetic oiland adhering to the prescribed oil change intervalsis important to prevent engine damage and ensuresatisfactory starting in cold conditions.

If Engine Fails To Start

WARNING!

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into thethrottle body air inlet opening in an attempt to startthe vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causingserious personal injury.

CAUTION!

• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to getit started. Vehicles equipped with a Alfa TwinClutch Transmission cannot be started this way.Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converterand once the engine has started, ignite and dam-age the converter and vehicle.

• To prevent damage to the starter, do not continu-ously crank the engine for more than 15 secondsat a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before tryingagain.

After Starting

The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it willdecrease as the engine warms up.

Turbo Charger “Cool Down”

This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to coolthe turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Dependingon the type of driving and the amount of cargo, thepump will run for up to five minutes after the enginehas been shut off to circulate coolant through theturbocharger.

5


Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet opera-tion, it is normal to hear it running during this time.

SIX-SPEED ALFA TWIN CLUTCHTRANSMISSION

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to shift out of NEUTRAL if theengine speed is higher than idle speed. If yourfoot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, thevehicle could accelerate quickly forward or inreverse. You could lose control of the vehicle andhit someone or something. Only shift into gearwhen the engine is idling normally and your footis firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injurethose in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,you should never exit a vehicle while the engineis running.

• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parkingbrake, shift the transmission into FIRST gear orREVERSE, turn the engine OFF, and remove thekey fob.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing childrento be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for anumber of reasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Children should bewarned not to touch the parking brake, brakepedal or the transmission gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (orin a location accessible to children). A child couldoperate power windows, other controls, or movethe vehicle.

Using The Transmission

This vehicle is equipped with a Six-Speed Alfa TwinClutch transmission with steering wheel mounted shiftpaddles.

When the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-sion controls (shift paddles on the steering wheel, andgear selector buttons on the center console) are dis-abled.


When the key is turned to the ON position, the currenttransmission gear will be displayed in the instrumentcluster, along with the �AUTO� indicator. This indicatesthe transmission is in Automatic mode.

Operating Modes

The transmission has two normal operating modes(except when the “Race” mode is selected on the DNAswitch):

• MANUAL mode: The driver must shift gears manu-ally (using the steering wheel mounted shiftpaddles).

• Automatic (AUTO) mode: The system shifts betweenall forward gears automatically.

When the “Race” mode is selected via the DNA selector,the only allowed transmission operating mode isMANUAL.

MANUAL Mode

In this operating mode, the driver is responsible forchoosing the best gear to engage, depending on thevehicle’s operating conditions. The current gear is dis-played in the instrument cluster.

To activate/deactivate MANUAL mode, push the A/Mbutton on the center console when the transmission is inany forward gear.

Use the “+” shift paddle to engage a higher gear, or the“–” paddle to engage a lower gear.

If a requested gear shift is not allowed (typically,because it would cause engine overspeed or lugging),an acoustic signal will sound and the transmission willremain in the existing gear.

The transmission will automatically downshift duringclosed-throttle decelerations, to prevent engine lugging.

Transmission Gear Selector

5


When coming to a stop, the transmission will automati-cally select FIRST (1st) gear. The driver must manuallyupshift the transmission (by tapping the + shift paddle)as the vehicle accelerates.

NOTE: To provide better comfort, the transmission willup-shift to the next available gear if the engine speedlimit is reached. This feature is only available in NATU-RAL and ALL WEATHER Modes.

AUTO Mode

In AUTO mode the transmission shifts gears automati-cally depending on vehicle speed, engine RPM, andaccelerator pedal position.

AUTO is the default operating mode at startup. Whenin AUTO mode, �AUTO� appears in the instrumentcluster, adjacent to the current gear display.

To toggle between AUTO and MANUAL modes, pushthe A/M button on the center console.

Accelerating From A Stop

FIRST (1) and REVERSE (R) can only be engaged (at astop) when the brake pedal is pressed.

To drive, press the brake pedal, and select 1 (1st) or R(REVERSE) using the transmission gear selector buttonson the center console. Then release the brake pedal andsmoothly press the accelerator pedal.

NOTE:

• The vehicle will not “creep” when the brake pedal isreleased, and may in fact roll down on an incline.Leaving from a stop, the accelerator pedal must bepressed to transmit driving torque to the wheels.

• When starting on a fairly steep incline, it may behelpful to engage the parking brake.

• The vehicle can only be launched (from a stop) inFIRST (1) or REVERSE (R). Second gear (or higher)cannot be engaged when the vehicle is stationary.

• If the brake pedal is not depressed (and the vehicle isstationary for a period of time), the transmission willautomatically engage NEUTRAL (N).

• FIRST (1) and REVERSE (R) gears can only be engagedat vehicle speeds below 2 mph (3 km/h). At speedsbelow 6 mph (10 km/h), attempts to shift from 1 to R(or R to 1) will only be allowed if the vehicle speeddrops below the 2 mph (3 km/h) threshold within


three seconds of the request; otherwise, the transmis-sion will shift to NEUTRAL (N). The driver shouldthen repeat the request for 1st or R once the vehicle hascome to a stop.

Shift Paddles

In MANUAL mode, the steering wheel mounted shiftpaddles (labeled + and -) control the transmissionshifting.

Tapping the (+) paddle will upshift the transmission tothe next higher gear, while tapping the (-) paddle willdownshift to the next lower gear. The current gear isdisplayed in the instrument cluster. If a requested shiftwould cause engine lugging or overspeed, that requestwill be ignored.

In AUTO mode, tapping a shift paddle will temporarilyplace the transmission in MANUAL mode, and executethe requested upshift or downshift (if allowable). Thetransmission will then return to AUTO mode after abrief interval.

Pressing a shift paddle will only shift the transmissionone gear at a time. Holding a paddle depressed will notcommand multiple shifts; the paddle must be pressedmultiple times in succession to generate multiple shifts.

Neutral (N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for pro-longed periods with the engine running. Always applythe parking brake if you must leave the vehicle.

At engine startup, the transmission will automaticallyselect NEUTRAL (N) and AUTO mode. The brake pedalmust be pressed when starting the engine.

To select NEUTRAL (N) when the vehicle is stationary,turn the ignition key to the MAR-ON position (enginerunning or not), press the brake pedal, and push the Nbutton on the transmission gear selector.

When the vehicle is moving (with ignition ON), push-ing the NEUTRAL (N) button will engage N, regardlessof whether the brake pedal is pressed.

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off theignition to coast down a hill. Coasting in NEUTRALand turning off the ignition while coasting severelylimit your ability to respond to changing traffic or roadconditions. Failure to follow this WARNING mayresult in loss of vehicle control, collision, and seriousinjury or death.

5


With the vehicle in motion, to engage a gear from theNEUTRAL (N) position, push the 1 button on thetransmission control panel (it is not necessary to pressthe brake pedal). The transmission will engage thecorrect gear according to the vehicle’s speed.

Acoustic Signal

If the vehicle is stationary with the engine running andFIRST (1) or REVERSE (R) engaged, the system acti-vates an acoustic signal and automatically places thetransmission in NEUTRAL (N) when:

• The accelerator and/or brake pedal are not operatedfor at least three minutes.

• The brake pedal is pressed for longer than 10 min-utes.

• The driver’s door is opened and the accelerator pedalor the brake pedal are not operated for at least oneand a half seconds.

• A fault has been detected in the transmission.

Parking The Vehicle

When parking and leaving the vehicle, proceed asfollows:

1. Make sure that the vehicle has come to a completestop.

2. With the brake pedal depressed, put the vehicle intoeither a forward or reverse gear by pushing 1 or R.(The vehicle may already be in 1 or R if you were justdriving.)

3. Engage the parking brake.

4. Turn off and remove the key.

5. Release the brake pedal.

When parking on an incline, turn the front wheelstoward the curb on a downhill slope and away from thecurb on an uphill slope. Always chock the wheels whenparking on steep grades.


General Notes

When the vehicle is stopped and in gear, always keepthe brake pedal pressed until you decide to set off, thenrelease the brake and accelerate gradually.

During prolonged stops with the engine running, it isadvisable to keep the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).

When stopped on an incline, always hold the vehicle inplace using the brakes. On steep inclines, Hill StartAssist (HSA) will temporarily hold the vehicle in posi-tion when the brake pedal is released. If the acceleratorpedal is not applied after a short time, the vehicle willroll back. Either reapply the brake (to hold the vehicle)or press the accelerator to climb the hill.

Only shift between FIRST (1) and REVERSE (R) whencompletely stopped, with the brake pedal pressed.

When necessary, it is possible to engage FIRST (1),REVERSE (R) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine off, thekey at MAR-ON and the brake pressed. In this case,wait at least five seconds between one gear change andthe next, in order to safeguard the operation of thehydraulic system, and the pump in particular.

For uphill departures, accelerate gradually but fully,immediately after releasing the parking brake or thebrake pedal; this allows the engine speed to increase toprovide more torque at the wheels.

ALFA DNA SYSTEM (DYNAMIC VEHICLECONTROL SYSTEM)

This vehicle is equipped with a “Alfa DNA” systemlever (located on the center console). There are fourmodes of operation to be selected according to drivingstyle and road conditions:

• Dynamic (This mode alters the transmission’s auto-matic shift schedule for sportier driving [D]).

• Natural (mode for driving in normal conditions [N]).

• All Weather (mode for driving in poor grip condi-tions, such as rain and snow [A]).

• Race (sports driving mode [D]).

5


This also acts on the dynamic vehicle control systems(engine, gearbox/transmission, ESC system).

Driving Modes

The Alfa DNA system lever will always return to thecenter position after use.

The selected driving mode is indicated by the corre-sponding LED switching in the panel and by an indi-cation on the display.

Dynamic Mode

Activation

Move the Alfa DNA system lever upwards (to the letter“D”) and hold in this position for half a second, untilthe corresponding LED lights up and the Dynamicmode activation indicator appears on the display.

When Dynamic mode is activated, the turbochargerpressure and engine oil temperature screen is displayedautomatically. When released, the Alfa DNA systemlever will return to the central position.

NOTE: Dynamic Mode will be inhibited until thevehicle has accumulated 155 miles (250 km).

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and Anti-SlipRegulation (ASR) systems:

The ESC and ASR system ensures more enjoyable,sportier driving while guaranteeing the stability of thevehicle.

Electronic Q2 system:

The system increases vehicle stability while acceleratingon bends, improving the agility of the vehicle.

Alfa DNA Mode Selector


Engine And Gearbox/Transmission:

The system adjusts the transmission shift calibration forsportier shifting.

NOTE: In Dynamic mode, the engine response to theaccelerator pedal position increases considerably. Con-sequently, driving is less fluid and comfortable.

Deactivation

To deactivate Dynamic mode and return to Natural,move lever downwards (to letter “A”) and hold for halfa second.

The LED corresponding to Natural mode will light upand the Natural mode activation indication will appearon the display.

Race Mode

Activation

Starting in Dynamic mode, move the Alfa DNA systemlever upwards (to the letter “D”) and hold in thisposition for five seconds, until the Race mode activationindicator appears on the display.

When Race mode is activated, the longitudinal/lateralaccelerometer indicator screen (G-meter information) isdisplayed automatically. This considers gravitationalacceleration (G).


These systems are deactivated in order to ensure thefullest sensation of sport, leaving the driver in fullcontrol of the vehicle. When the vehicle is in unstableconditions, the ESC reactivates automatically when thebrake pedal is pressed until the ABS intervenes, thusreturning the vehicle to stable conditions. To deactivatethe ESC and ASR systems, reactivate Race mode.


The system increases vehicle stability while acceleratingon bends, improving the agility of the vehicle.


The system adjusts the transmission shift calibration forsportier shifting.

NOTE: In Race mode, the sensitivity of the acceleratorpedal increases considerably. Consequently, driving isless fluid and comfortable.

5


In Race mode, the transmission only works inMANUAL mode.

Deactivation

To deactivate Race mode and return to Dynamic mode,move the Alfa DNA system lever downwards (to letter“A”) and keep it in this position for half a second.

The LED corresponding to Dynamic mode will light upand the Dynamic mode activation indication will ap-pear on the display.

Natural Mode


ESC and ASR system thresholds are aimed at providingcomfort and safety in normal grip and driving condi-tions.


The system is calibrated to ensure the best drivingcomfort.


Standard response shifting.

All Weather Mode

Activation

Move the Alfa DNA system lever downwards (to the letter“A”) and hold in this position for half a second, until thecorresponding LED lights up and the All Weather modeactivation indicator appears on the display.


ESC and ASR system thresholds are aimed at ensuringmaximum safety in low-grip driving conditions. It isadvisable to select All Weather mode in the presence oflow-grip road surfaces.

Electronic Q2 System:

The system is deactivated.


Standard response shifting.

DeactivationTo deactivate All Weather mode and return to Naturalmode, move the Alfa DNA system lever upwards (toletter “D”) and keep it in this position for half a second.


NOTE:

• When the engine is next started, All Weather mode orNatural mode will be retained when the vehicle isrestarted.

• When the engine is next started, Race mode orDynamic mode previously selected is not retained.The system will reactivate in Natural mode.

• It is not possible to go directly from Dynamic modeto All Weather mode and vice versa. You mustalways first go back to Natural mode and then selectthe other mode.

System Failure

In the event of system failure or a fault with the gearselector, no driving modes can be selected.

The display will become grey (same screen as �Natural�mode) but without an indication of the Alfa DNAsetting. The display will also show a warning message.

Please contact your authorized dealer for service.

Launch Control

The Launch Control strategy permits high-performanceacceleration from stand still.

This strategy can be activated with vehicle at a stand-still, Race mode selected and FIRST (1st) gear engaged.

The sequence of operations to perform is as follows:

1. Press the brake pedal and hold it down.

2. Press the accelerator pedal and hold it down.

3. Press the �–� paddle behind the steering wheel. (Thisallows the engine to rev above the 3000 RPM limit.)

When the brake pedal is released, the vehicle will startwith maximum acceleration. Despite the MANUALmode, the vehicle will automatically shift the gear toguarantee maximum acceleration, once the correct shift-ing speed has been reached.

WARNING!

Launch Control is intended for off-highway oroff-road use only and should not be used on anypublic roadways. Use Launch Control only in acontrolled and dry track environment; within thelimits of the law. Actual Launch Control perfor-mance may change depending on the surface andcurrent traction conditions. The capabilities of the

(Continued)

5


WARNING! (Continued)vehicle as measured by the performance pages mustnever be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-ner, which can jeopardize the user’s safety or thesafety of others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillfuldriver can prevent accidents. Failure to follow thiswarning may result in serious injury or death.

To discontinue the strategy, simply interrupt the abovesequence of operations or release the accelerator pedal.

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

Acceleration

Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or otherslippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pullerratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurswhen there is a difference in the surface traction underthe rear (driving) wheels.

WARNING!

Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger-ous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)the rear wheels. You could lose control of thevehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerateslowly and carefully whenever there is likely to bepoor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).

Traction

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible fora wedge of water to build up between the tire and roadsurface. This is known as hydroplaning and may causepartial or complete loss of vehicle control and stoppingability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-tions should be observed:

• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads areslushy.

• Slow down if the road has standing water orpuddles.

• Replace tires when tread wear indicators first becomevisible.

• Keep tires properly inflated.


• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicleand the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision ina sudden stop.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited SlipDifferential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate,the amount of wheel slip across a given axle forimproved handling.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensuresafety and prevent damage to your vehicle.

Flowing/Rising Water

WARNING!

Do not drive on or across a road or path where wateris flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowingwater can wear away the road or path’s surface andcause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further-more, flowing and/or rising water can carry yourvehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warningmay result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,your passengers, and others around you.

Shallow Standing Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving throughshallow standing water, consider the following Cau-tions and Warnings before doing so.

WARNING!

• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.

• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-ping distances. Therefore, after driving throughstanding water, drive slowly and lightly press onthe brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.

• Failure to follow these warnings may result ininjuries that are serious or fatal to you, yourpassengers, and others around you.

5


CAUTION!

• Always check the depth of the standing waterbefore driving through it. Never drive throughstanding water that is deeper than the bottom ofthe tire rims mounted on the vehicle.

• Determine the condition of the road or the paththat is under water and if there are any obstaclesin the way before driving through the standingwater.

• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when drivingthrough standing water. This will minimize waveeffects.

• Driving through standing water may cause dam-age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)after driving through standing water. Do notcontinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid ap-pears contaminated, as this may result in furtherdamage. Such damage is not covered by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can

cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause seriousinternal damage to the engine. Such damage isnot covered by the New Vehicle Limited War-ranty.

PARKING BRAKE

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parkingbrake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave manualtransmission in REVERSE (R) or FIRST (1st) gear.

The parking brake lever is located in the central tunnel.To apply the parking brake, pull the parking brake leverup as firmly as possible. To release the parking brake,pull the parking brake lever up slightly, push the centerbutton, then lower the parking brake lever completely.


When the parking brake is applied with the ignitionswitch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, theBrake Warning Light in the instrument cluster displaywill illuminate.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the frontwheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and awayfrom the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brakeshould always be applied whenever the driver is not inthe vehicle.

WARNING!

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or withaccess to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended isdangerous for a number of reasons. A child orothers could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-dren should be warned not to touch the parkingbrake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selec-tor.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle orin a location accessible to children. A child couldoperate power windows, other controls, or movethe vehicle.

• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengagedbefore driving; failure to do so can lead to brakefailure and a collision.

• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damageor injury. Also be certain to leave a manualtransmission in REVERSE or FIRST gear. Failureto do so may allow the vehicle to roll and causedamage or injury.

Parking Brake Lever

5


CAUTION!

If the Brake Warning Light remains on with theparking brake released, a brake system malfunctionis indicated. Have the brake system serviced by anauthorized dealer immediately.

BRAKE SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brakesystems. If either of the two hydraulic systems losesnormal capability, the remaining system will still func-tion. However, there will be some loss of overall brak-ing effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travelduring application, greater pedal force required to slowor stop, and potential activation of the “Brake SystemWarning Light”.

In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,repeated brake applications with the engine off), thebrakes will still function. However, the effort requiredto brake the vehicle will be much greater than thatrequired with the power system operating.

ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL)SYSTEM

The ESC system improves the directional control andstability of the vehicle in various driving conditions.

The ESC system corrects the vehicle understeer andoversteer, distributing the brake force on the appropri-ate wheels. The torque supplied by the engine can alsobe reduced in order to maintain control of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot preventthe natural laws of physics from acting on thevehicle, nor can it increase the traction affordedby prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot pre-vent all collisions, including those resulting fromexcessive speed in turns, driving on very slipperysurfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot pre-vent collisions resulting from loss of vehiclecontrol due to inappropriate driver input for theconditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillfuldriver can prevent collisions. The capabilities ofan ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued)in a reckless or dangerous manner which couldjeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properlymaintain your vehicle, may change the handlingcharacteristics of your vehicle, and may nega-tively affect the performance of the ESC system.Changes to the steering system, suspension, brak-ing system, tire type and size or wheel size mayadversely affect ESC performance. Improperlyinflated and unevenly worn tires may also de-grade ESC performance. Any vehicle modifica-tion or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces theeffectiveness of the ESC system can increase therisk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,personal injury and death.

The ESC system uses sensors installed on the vehicle todetermine the trajectory that the driver intends tofollow and compares it with the vehicles effectivetrajectory. When the real trajectory deviates from thedesired trajectory, the ESC system intervenes to counterthe vehicles understeer or oversteer.

• Oversteer: occurs when the vehicle is turning morethan it should according to the angle of the steeringwheel.

• Understeer: occurs when the vehicle is turning lessthan it should according to the angle of the steeringwheel.

This vehicle’s advanced electronic brake control systemalso includes: Electronic Brake Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Cornering Brake ControlSystem (CBC), Drag Torque Control System (DTC),AntiSlip Regulation System (ASR), Hill Start Assist(HSA), Hydraulic Brake Assistant System (HBA),ELECTRONIC Q2 system (E-Q2) and Ready Alert Brake(RAB). All of the systems work together to enhancevehicle stability and control in various driving condi-tions, and are commonly referred to as ESC.

System Activation

The ESC system activates automatically when the en-gine is started and can only be deactivated by selecting�Race� mode. Refer to the �Six-Speed Alfa Twin ClutchTransmission� in this section for further information.

5


System Intervention

This is indicated by the flashing of the warning light onthe instrument panel, to inform the driver that thevehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions.

Electronic Brake Distribution System (EBD)

The EBD system is an integral part of the ESC systemand intervenes during braking, distributing the brakeforce optimally between front and rear wheels.

This guarantees greater braking stability for the vehicle,preventing sudden locking of the rear wheels and theconsequent instability of the vehicle.

Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver inmaintaining vehicle control under adverse braking con-ditions. The system operates with a separate computerto modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheellock-up and to help avoid skidding on slippery sur-faces.

The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop toprovide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motormakes a low humming noise during operation, which isnormal.

The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. Whenthe light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. Thesystem reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turn-ing the ignition OFF and ON again may reset the ABS ifthe fault detected was only momentary.

WARNING!

• When the ABS intervenes and you feel the brakepedal pulsating, do not reduce the pressure, buthold it down firmly and confidently; in doing soyou will brake in the shortest distance possible,depending on the current road conditions.

• For maximum efficiency of the braking system, abedding-in period of about 311 miles (500 km) isrequired: during this period it is advisable toavoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking.

• If the ABS intervenes, this indicates that the gripof the tires on the road is nearing its limit: youmust slow down to a speed compatible with theavailable grip.

• The ABS can’t overrule the natural laws of phys-ics, and can’t increase the grip available accordingto the condition of the road.

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued)• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including

those due to excessive speed on corners, drivingon low-grip surfaces or aquaplaning.

• The capability of the ABS must never be testedirresponsibly and dangerously, in such a way asto compromise personal safety and the safety ofothers.

• For the correct operation of the ABS, the tiresmust of necessity be the same make and type onall wheels, in perfect condition and, above all, ofthe prescribed type and dimensions.

When you are in a severe braking condition involvingthe use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal dropas the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of thesystem reverting to the base brake system.

Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by apulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.These occurrences are normal and indicate that thesystem is functioning properly.

System Intervention

A slight pulsing of the brake pedal and noise indicatesthe intervention of the ABS: this is completely normalwhen the system intervenes.

Cornering Brake Control System (CBC)

The system acts when braking on corners, optimizingthe distribution of brake pressure on the four wheels:the system prevents the wheels on the inside of thecorner (less affected by the weight of the vehicle) fromlocking, ensuring better stability and direction for thevehicle.

Drag Torque Control System (DTC)

This is an integral part of the ESC system and inter-venes in the event of sudden downshifting, or duringbraking when the ABS intervenes, restoring torque tothe engine and thus preventing excessive drag at thedrive wheels, which may lead the wheels to lock and aloss of vehicle stability, above all in low-grip conditions.

5


AntiSlip Regulation System (ASR)

WARNING!

• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot preventthe natural laws of physics from acting on thevehicle, nor can it increase the traction affordedby prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot pre-vent all collisions, including those resulting fromexcessive speed in turns, driving on very slipperysurfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot pre-vent collisions resulting from loss of vehiclecontrol due to inappropriate driver input for theconditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillfuldriver can prevent collisions. The capabilities ofan ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploitedin a reckless or dangerous manner which couldjeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properlymaintain your vehicle, may change the handlingcharacteristics of your vehicle, and may nega-tively affect the performance of the ESC system.Changes to the steering system, suspension, brak-ing system, tire type and size or wheel size may

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)adversely affect ESC performance. Improperlyinflated and unevenly worn tires may also de-grade ESC performance. Any vehicle modifica-tion or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces theeffectiveness of the ESC system can increase therisk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,personal injury and death.

This is an integral part of the ESC system and automati-cally operates in the event of one or both drive wheelsslipping, loss of grip on wet roads (hydroplaning) andacceleration on slippery, snowy or icy roads, etc.

Depending on the slipping conditions, two differentcontrol systems are activated:

• If the slipping involves both drive wheels, the ASRsystem intervenes, reducing the power transmittedby the engine.

• If the slipping only involves one of the drive wheels,it also intervenes automatically, braking the wheelthat is slipping.


System Intervention

This is indicated by the flashing of the warning light onthe instrument panel, to inform the driver that thevehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

This is an integral part of the ESC system and facilitatesstarting on slopes, activating automatically in the fol-lowing cases:

• Uphill: vehicle stationary on a road with a gradienthigher than 5%, engine running, brake pressed andtransmission in neutral (N) or gear other than reverseengaged.

• Downhill: vehicle stationary on a road with a gradi-ent higher than 5%, engine running, brake pressedand reverse (R) gear engaged.

When setting off, the ESC system control unit maintainsthe braking pressure on the wheels until the enginetorque necessary for starting is reached, or in any casefor a maximum of two seconds, allowing your right footto be moved easily from the brake pedal to the accel-erator.

When the two seconds have elapsed, without starting,the system is automatically deactivated, gradually re-leasing the braking pressure. During this release stage,the typical brake disengagement noise, indicating thatthe vehicle is going to move imminently, can be heard.

NOTE:

• HSA is not a parking brake; therefore, never leave thevehicle without having engaged the parking brake,turned the engine off and engaged first gear, so thatthe vehicle is parked in safe conditions.

• There may be situations on small gradients (less than8%), with vehicle laden, in which the Hill Holdersystem may not activate, causing a slight reversingmotion and increasing the risk of collision withanother vehicle or object. The driver is, in any case,responsible for safe driving.

5


Hydraulic Brake Assistant System (HBA)

WARNING!

• The HBA system can’t overrule the natural lawsof physics, and can’t increase the grip availableaccording to the condition of the road.

• The HBA system cannot prevent accidents, in-cluding those due to excessive speed on corners,driving on low-grip surfaces or aquaplaning.

• The capability of the HBA system must never betested irresponsibly and dangerously, in such away as to compromise the safety of the driver, theother occupants of the vehicle or any other roaduser.

The HBA system is designed to improve the vehiclesbraking capacity during emergency braking. The sys-tem detects emergency braking by monitoring thespeed and force with which the brake pedal is pressed,and consequently applies the optimal brake pressure.This can reduce the braking distance, the HBA systemtherefore completes the ABS.

Maximum assistance from the HBA system is obtainedpressing the brake pedal very quickly. In addition, the

brake pedal should be pressed continuously duringbraking, avoiding intermittent presses, to get the mostout of the system.

Do not reduce pressure on the brake pedal until brakingis no longer necessary.

The HBA system is deactivated when the brake pedal isreleased.

Electronic Q2 System (E-Q2)

The �Electronic Q2� system intervenes during accelera-tion on corners, braking the inner drive wheel and thusincreasing the traction of the outer wheel (which bearsmore of the vehicles weight): the torque is thus distrib-uted optimally between the drive wheels in accordancewith the driving conditions and road surface, permit-ting particularly effective, sporty driving.

Ready Alert Brake System (RAB)

This function activates automatically if the acceleratorpedal is released rapidly, reducing the brake pad travel(both at front and back), with the aim of preparing thebraking system and enhancing its responsiveness, thusreducing the stopping distance in the event of subse-quent braking.


TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings

NOTE:

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

• European — Metric tire sizing is based on Europeandesign standards. Tires designed to this standardhave the tire size molded into the sidewall beginningwith the section width. The letter �P� is absent fromthis tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.design standards. The size designation for LT-Metrictires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for theletters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporaryemergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded intothe sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-ample: T145/80D18 103M.

• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. designstandards and it begins with the tire diametermolded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-dards Code (TIN)

4 — Maximum Load

2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and

Temperature Grades

5


Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or�....blank....� = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, orLT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, orT or S = Temporary spare tire or31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or10.5 = Section width in inches (in)R = Construction code

– �R� means radial construction, or– �D� means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)


EXAMPLE:Service Description:

95 = Load Index– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding toits load index under certain operating conditions– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved underspecified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, andposted speed limits)

Load Identification:Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)tire:• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or• LL = Light load tire or• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressureMaximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carryMaximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure forthis tire

5


Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;however, the date code may only be on one side. Tireswith white sidewalls will have the full TIN, includingthe date code, located on the white sidewall side of the

tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of blacksidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN isnot found on the outboard side, then you will find it onthe inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tiresafety standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

– 03 means the 3rd week01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

– 01 means the year 2001– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the yearin which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991


Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term DefinitionB-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located

behind the front door.Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after

the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of threehours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissiblecold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflationpressure is molded into the sidewall.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres-sure

Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressureas shown on the tire placard.

Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and therecommended cold tire inflation pressures.

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

Tire And Loading Information Placard Location

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listedon the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of thedriver’s side door.

Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including thespare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate tothe recommended pressure for your vehicle.

5


WARNING!

• Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overload-ing can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling,and increase your stopping distance. Use tires ofthe recommended load capacity for your vehicle.Never overload them.

• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and cancause collisions. Under-inflation increases tireflexing and can result in over-heating and tirefailure. Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability tocushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that results in tire failure.Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affectvehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resultingin loss of vehicle control. Always drive with eachtire inflated to the recommended cold tire infla-tion pressure.

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)


Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, andspare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceedthe load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle.You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity ifyou adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and coldtire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Load-ing Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in “Start-ing And Operating”, or the Tire Information Supple-ment, located in your Owner’s Information kit.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front andrear axles must not be exceeded. Refer to “VehicleLoading” in “Starting And Operating”, or the TireInformation Supplement located in your Owner’s Infor-mation kit, for further information on GAWRs, vehicleloading, and trailer towing.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of yourvehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage andtrailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never ex-ceed the weight referenced here.

Tire And Loading Information Placard

5


Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver andpassengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amountof cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage andcargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the available cargo and luggageload capacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load fromyour trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.

Consult this manual to determine how this reducesthe available cargo and luggage load capacity of yourvehicle.

Metric Example For Load Limit

For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg, and therewill be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.

NOTE:

• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load fromyour trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Thefollowing table shows examples on how to calculatetotal load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities ofyour vehicle with varying seating configurations andnumber and size of occupants. This table is forillustration purposes only and may not be accuratefor the seating and load carry capacity of yourvehicle.

• For the following example, the combined weight ofoccupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs(392 kg).


WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overload-ing can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling,and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of therecommended load capacity for your vehicle. Neveroverload them.

5


TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe andsatisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primaryareas are affected by improper tire pressure:

• Safety and Vehicle Stability

• Economy

• Tread Wear

• Ride Comfort

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and cancause collisions.

• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can re-sult in overheating and tire failure.

• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushionshock. Objects on the road and chuckholes cancause damage that result in tire failure.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-

hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting inloss of vehicle control.

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.

• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift tothe right or left.

• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-mended cold tire inflation pressure.

Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stabil-ity of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggishresponse or over responsiveness in the steering.

NOTE:

• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may causeerratic and unpredictable steering response.

• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause thevehicle to drift left or right.

Fuel Economy

Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistanceresulting in higher fuel consumption.


Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting inthe need for earlier tire replacement.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortableride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on thedriver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s sidedoor.

At least once a month:

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good qualitypocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visualjudgement when determining proper inflation. Tiresmay look properly inflated even when they areunder-inflated.

• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will pre-vent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,which could damage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pres-sure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle hasnot been driven for at least three hours, or driven lessthan 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of threehours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceedthe maximum inflation pressure molded into the tiresidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a widerange of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures varywith temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this inmind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,especially in the Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and theoutside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire

5


inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for thisoutside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressurebuild up or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds andwithin posted speed limits. Where speed limits orconditions are such that the vehicle can be driven athigh speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressureis very important. Increased tire pressure and reducedvehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicleoperation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or origi-nal equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safeoperating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pres-sures.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-mum load is dangerous. The added strain on yourtires could cause them to fail. You could have a

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded tothe maximum capacity at continuous speeds above75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tireson your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handlepoorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Nevercombine them with other types of tires.

Tire Repair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if itmeets the following criteria:

• The tire has not been driven on when flat.

• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire(sidewall damage is not repairable).

• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs andadditional information.


Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that haveexperienced a loss of pressure should be replacedimmediately with another Run Flat tire of identical sizeand service description (Load Index and Speed Sym-bol).

Tire Types

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may varybetween different all season tires. All season tires can beidentified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation onthe tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;failure to do so may adversely affect the safety andhandling of your vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dryconditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow oron ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, beaware these tires are not designed for Winter or colddriving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehiclewhen ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) orif roads are covered with ice or snow. For more infor-mation, contact an authorized dealer.

Summer tires do not contain the all season designationor mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do somay adversely affect the safety and handling of yourvehicle.

WARNING!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severeinjury or death. Driving too fast for conditions alsocreates the possibility of loss of vehicle control.

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tiresduring the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tiresequivalent in size and type to theoriginal equipment tires. Use snowtires only in sets of four; failure to doso may adversely affect the safetyand handling of your vehicle.

5


Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings thanwhat was originally equipped with your vehicle andshould not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), referto original equipment or an authorized tire dealer forrecommended safe operating speeds, loading and coldtire inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skidand traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded tires. Some statesprohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should bechecked before using these tire types.

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss ofinflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referredto as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs whenthe tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa).Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode, it haslimited driving capabilities and needs to be replacedimmediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.

It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded at fullcapacity, or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flatmode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-mation.

Spare Tires — If Equipped

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kitinstead of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire ServiceKit” section located in your Owner’s Information kit forfurther information.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do nottake your vehicle through an automatic car washwith a compact or limited use temporary spareinstalled. Damage to the vehicle may result.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire AndWheel — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire andwheel equivalent in look and function to the originalequipment tire and wheel found on the front or rearaxle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in thetire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has thisoption, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recom-mended tire rotation pattern.


Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency useonly. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped witha compact spare by looking at the spare tire descriptionon the Tire and Loading Information Placard located onthe driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of thetire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with theletter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Ex-ample: T145/80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-stalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount aconventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since thewheel is designed specifically for the compact sparetire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire andwheel on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!

Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporaryemergency use only. With these spares, do not drivemore than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spareshave limited tread life. When the tread is worn tothe tread wear indicators, the temporary use sparetire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow thewarnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to doso could result in spare tire failure and loss ofvehicle control.

Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped

The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency useonly. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped witha collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire descrip-tion on the Tire and Loading Information Placardlocated on the driver’s side door opening or on thesidewall of the tire.

Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-stalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

5


Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properlyinstalled to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire usingthe electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount aconventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, sincethe wheel is designed specifically for the collapsiblespare tire.

WARNING!

Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporaryemergency use only. With these spares, do not drivemore than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spareshave limited tread life. When the tread is worn tothe tread wear indicators, the temporary use sparetire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow thewarnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to doso could result in spare tire failure and loss ofvehicle control.

Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.This tire may look like the originally equipped tire onthe front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Thisspare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread isworn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary usefull size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is notthe same as your original equipment tire, replace (orrepair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on thevehicle at the first opportunity.

Limited Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergencyuse only. This tire is identified by a label located on thelimited use spare wheel. This label contains the drivinglimitations for this spare. This tire may look like theoriginal equipped tire on the front or rear axle of yourvehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited usespare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not thesame as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair)the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicleat the first opportunity.


WARNING!

Limited use spares are for emergency use only.Installation of this limited use spare tire affectsvehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive morethan the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel.Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressureslisted on your Tire and Loading Information Plac-ard located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rearedge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair)the original equipment tire at the first opportunityand reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do socould result in loss of vehicle control.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, donot spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)or for longer than 30 seconds continuously withoutstopping.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do InEmergencies” for further information.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tiredamage or failure. A tire could explode and injuresomeone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels fasterthan 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 secondscontinuously when you are stuck, and do not letanyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what thespeed.

5


Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipmenttires to help you in determining when your tires shouldbe replaced.

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the treadgrooves. They will appear as bands when the treaddepth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the

tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tireshould be replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in thissection for further information.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varyingfactors including, but not limited to:

• Driving style.

• Tire pressure – Improper cold tire inflation pressurescan cause uneven wear patterns to develop across thetire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reducetread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-ment.

• Distance driven.

• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V orhigher, and Summer tires typically have a reducedtread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehiclemaintenance schedule is highly recommended.

Tire Tread

1 — Worn Tire2 — New Tire


WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after sixyears, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure tofollow this warning can result in sudden tire fail-ure. You could lose control and have a collisionresulting in serious injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as littleexposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contactwith oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance ofmany characteristics. They should be inspected regu-larly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures.The manufacturer strongly recommends that you usetires equivalent to the originals in size, quality andperformance when replacement is needed. Refer to theparagraph on “Tread Wear Indicator” in this section.Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard orthe Vehicle Certification Label for the size designationof your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for yourtire will be found on the original equipment tire side-wall.

See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “TireSafety Information” section of this manual for moreinformation relating to the Load Index and SpeedSymbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or tworear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace awheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications matchthose of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact your authorized tiredealer or original equipment dealer with any questionsyou may have on tire specifications or capability. Fail-ure to use equivalent replacement tires may adverselyaffect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other thanthat specified for your vehicle. Some combina-tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change

(Continued)

5


WARNING! (Continued)suspension dimensions and performance charac-teristics, resulting in changes to steering, han-dling, and braking of your vehicle. This can causeunpredictable handling and stress to steering andsuspension components. You could lose controland have a collision resulting in serious injury ordeath. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with loadratings approved for your vehicle.

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index orcapacity, other than what was originally equippedon your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller loadindex could result in tire overloading and failure.You could lose control and have a collision.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires havingadequate speed capability can result in suddentire failure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different sizemay result in false speedometer and odometer read-ings.

TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear-ance. Follow these recommendations to guard againstdamage.

• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, asrecommended by the traction device manufacturer.

• Install on Rear Tires Only.

• Reduced size snow chains with a maximum projec-tion of 7 mm beyond the tire profile can be fitted onvehicles equipped with 235/40 R18 rear tire.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observethe following precautions:• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-

tween tires and other suspension components, it isimportant that only traction devices in good condi-tion are used. Broken devices can cause seriousdamage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noiseoccurs that could indicate device breakage. Removethe damaged parts of the device before further use.

(Continued)


CAUTION! (Continued)• Install device as tightly as possible and then

retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large

bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry

pavement.• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s in-

structions on the method of installation, operat-ing speed, and conditions for use. Always use thesuggested operating speed of the device manufac-turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).

• Do not use traction devices on a compact sparetire.

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

Due to tire design and size, tire rotations on this vehicleare not possible.

NOTE: For AR 4C models, where available, the vehiclemay be equipped with high performance tires thatguarantee high grip performance with little increase ofwear. Alfa Romeo, in collaboration with Pirelli, devel-oped a specific high performance tire for the 4C model.A dedicated Pirelli PZero, identified with an AR mark,guarantees this vehicle to obtain the highest perfor-mance capable.

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORMTIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading categories were establishedby the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manu-facturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of thetires on your vehicle.

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federalsafety requirements in addition to these grades.

5


Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based onthe wear rate of the tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified government test course. Forexample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from the norm due to varia-tions in driving habits, service practices, and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stopon wet pavement, as measured under controlled condi-tions on specified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, orpeak traction characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tirefailure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-mance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meetunder the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of perfor-mance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimumrequired by law.


WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is establishedfor a tire that is properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or exces-sive loading, either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn thedriver of a low tire pressure based on the vehiclerecommended cold tire pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means thatwhen the outside temperature decreases, the tire pres-sure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be setbased on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined asthe tire pressure after the vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflationpressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-sure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires –General Information” in “Starting And Operating” forinformation on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s

tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle isdriven, this is normal and there should be no adjust-ment for this increased pressure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure ifthe tire pressure falls below the low pressure warninglimit for any reason, including low temperature effects,or natural pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tirepressure as long as the condition exists, and will notturn off until the tire pressure is at or above therecommended cold tire pressure on the placard. Oncethe low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure MonitoringTelltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tirepressure to the recommended cold tire pressure in orderfor the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turnoff. The system will automatically update and the TirePressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once thesystem receives the updated tire pressures. The vehiclemay need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive thisinformation.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommendedcold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F

5


(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi(186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) willdecrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi(159 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enoughto turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise toapproximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire PressureMonitoring Telltale Light will still be on. In this situa-tion, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light willturn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’srecommended cold tire pressure value.

CAUTION!

• The TPMS has been optimized for the originalequipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures andwarnings have been established for the tire sizeequipped on your vehicle. Undesirable systemoperation or sensor damage may result whenusing replacement equipment that is not of thesame size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheelscan cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tiresealants may cause the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recom-mended that you take your vehicle to an autho-rized dealership to have your sensor functionchecked.

• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,always reinstall the valve stem cap. This willprevent moisture and dirt from entering the valvestem, which could damage the Tire PressureMonitoring Sensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire careand maintenance, or to provide warning of a tirefailure or condition.

• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressuregauge while adjusting your tire pressure.

• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causesthe tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.


• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge,even if under-inflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the Tire Pressure MonitoringTelltale Light.

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tirepressure in the tire.

Base System

This is the TPMS warning indicator located inthe instrument cluster.

The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rimmounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressurelevels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of thevalve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Re-ceiver Module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check thetire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularlyand to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module.

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-nate in the instrument cluster, an acoustic signal will beactivated, and the “Check left or right front/rear tire”text message will display when one or more of the fouractive road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, youshould stop as soon as possible, check the inflationpressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate eachtire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressurevalue. The system will automatically update and theTire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once theupdated tire pressures have been received. The vehiclemay need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.

5


Check TPMS Warnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash onand off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when asystem fault is detected, the “TIRE PRESSURE MONI-TORING UNAVAILABLE” text message will display. Ifthe ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeatproviding the system fault still exists. The Tire PressureMonitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the faultcondition no longer exists. A system fault can occurwith any of the following scenarios:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next tofacilities emitting the same radio frequencies as theTPM sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tintingthat affects radio wave signals.

3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with a compactspare wheel and tire assembly.

1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressuremonitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will notmonitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.

2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a roadtire that has a pressure below the low-pressurewarning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, achime will sound and the Tire Pressure MonitoringTelltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire.

3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire PressureMonitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for75 seconds and then remain on solid.

4. This occurs for each subsequent ignition key cycle, achime will sound and the Tire Pressure MonitoringTelltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds andthen remain on solid.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire andreinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compactspare tire, the TPMS will update automatically andthe Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turnOFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road


tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for theTPMS to receive this information.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules andRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.

(2) This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesired opera-tion.


FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1750 TURBO

The 1750 turbo engine is designed tomeet all emissions regulations and pro-vide excellent fuel economy and perfor-mance when using high-quality premiumunleaded gasoline with an octane ratingof Only 91 or higher.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmfulto your engine. However, continued heavy spark knockat high speeds can cause damage and immediate ser-vice is required.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hardstarting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience thesesymptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with theappropriate octane rating for your engine) before con-sidering service for the vehicle.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleanerburning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gaso-line”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates andare specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions andimprove air quality.

The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provideimproved performance and durability of engine andfuel system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline withoxygenates such as ethanol.

5


CAUTION!

DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso-line containing more than 10% ethanol (E-10). Useof these blends may result in starting and drivabil-ity problems, damage critical fuel system compo-nents, cause emissions to exceed the applicablestandard, and/or cause the “Malfunction IndicatorLight” to illuminate. Please observe pump labels asthey should clearly communicate if a fuel containsgreater than 10% ethanol (E-10).

Problems that result from using gasoline containingmore than 10% ethanol (E-10) or gasoline containingmethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturerand may void or not be covered under New VehicleLimited Warranty.

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-line containing up to 10% ethanol (E-10). Gasoline withhigher ethanol content may void the New VehicleLimited Warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symp-toms:

• Operate in a lean mode.

• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.

• Poor engine performance.

• Poor cold start and cold drivability.

• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.

CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications

Modifications that allow the engine to run on com-pressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) mayresult in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuelsystem components. Problems that result from runningCNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufac-turer and may void or not be covered under the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

MMT In Gasoline

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)is a manganese-containing metallic additive that isblended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasolineblended with MMT provides no performance advantage


beyond gasoline of the same octane number withoutMMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark pluglife and reduces emissions system performance in somevehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasolinewithout MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT contentof gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whetherthe gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federaland California reformulated gasoline.

Materials Added To Fuel

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octanerating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion, andstability additives are recommended. Using gasolinesthat have these additives will help improve fueleconomy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle per-formance.

Designated TOP TIER DetergentGasoline contains a higher level ofdetergents to further aide in mini-mizing engine and fuel system de-posits. When available, the usage ofTop Tier Detergent gasoline is recom-mended. Visit www.toptiergas.com

for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agentsshould be avoided. Many of these materials intendedfor gum and varnish removal may contain active sol-vents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel sys-tem gasket and diaphragm materials.

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’sperformance:• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal

law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-formance and damage the emissions control sys-tem.

• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignitionmalfunctions can cause the catalytic converter tooverheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor orsome light smoke, your engine may be out of tuneor malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-vice. Contact your authorized dealer for serviceassistance.

• The use of fuel additives, which are now beingsold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.

(Continued)

5


http://www.toptiergas.com

CAUTION! (Continued)Most of these products contain high concentra-tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicleperformance problems resulting from the use ofsuch fuels or additives is not the responsibility ofthe manufacturer and may void or not be coveredunder the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions con-trol system can result in civil penalties being assessedagainst you.

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.Follow the precautions below to prevent carbonmonoxide poisoning:• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon

monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which cankill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such asa garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle withthe engine running for an extended period. If the

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)vehicle is stopped in an open area with the enginerunning for more than a short period, adjust theventilation system to force fresh, outside air intothe vehicle.

• Guard against carbon monoxide with propermaintenance. Have the exhaust system inspectedevery time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,drive with all side windows fully open.

ADDING FUEL/SMART FUEL

NOTE:

• The �Smart Fuel� is a device placed on the top of thefiller pipe; it opens and closes automatically whenthe fuel nozzle is inserted or extracted.

• Only the correct nozzle size diameter allows the flapdoor to open when the nozzle is inserted.

Refueling Procedure

1. Open the fuel filler door pulling towards outside.


2. There is no fuel filler cap. A flap door inside the pipeseals the system.

3. Insert the fuel nozzle into the filler pipe (the nozzleopens and holds the flap door while refueling) andstart refueling. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shutsoff, the fuel tank is full.

4. At the end of refueling, before removing the nozzle,wait at least 10 seconds to allow the fuel to flowwithin the tank.

5. Remove the fuel nozzle from the filler pipe and thenclose the fuel door.

Fuel Filler Door Location Fuel Nozzle Location

5


Emergency Gas Can Refueling:

Most gas cans will not open the flapper door.

A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allowemergency refueling with a gas can.

1. Retrieve the appropriate funnel from the storage areain the luggage compartment.

2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuelnozzle.

3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper dooropen.

4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.

5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior toputting back in the storage area.

CAUTION!

To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “topoff” the fuel tank after filling.

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or nearthe vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tankis being filled.

• Never add fuel when the engine is running. Thisis in violation of most state and federal fireregulations and may cause the “Malfunction In-dicator Light” to turn on.

• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portablecontainer that is inside of a vehicle. You could beburned. Always place fuel containers on theground while filling.

Emergency Fuel Fill Location


TRAILER TOWING

Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHINDMOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed orvehicle trailer, provided all four wheels are OFF theground.

CAUTION!

• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to thedrivetrain will result.

• Do not dolly tow this vehicle. Use of a towingdolly can cause significant damage to your ve-hicle. Damage from improper towing is not cov-ered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the aboverequirements can cause severe transmission dam-age. Damage from improper towing is not coveredunder the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Alfa TwinClutch Transmission

Flat Tow None NOT ALLOWEDDolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED

Rear NOT ALLOWEDOn Trailer All OK

5


WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS� HAZARD WARNING FLASHER . . . . . . . . . .200

� IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . .200

� WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUESPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201

▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201

� TIRE SERVICE KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

� JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208

▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . .209

▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210

� FRONT TOW EYE USAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212

� FIRE EXTINGUISHER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .214

� ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSESYSTEM (EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214

� EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . .215

6

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on thecenter console.

Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warningflasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-

tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncom-ing traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a secondtime to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.

This is an emergency warning system and it should notbe used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when yourvehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard forother motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, theHazard Warning flasher will continue to operate eventhough the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashermay wear down your battery.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce thepotential for overheating by taking the appropriateaction.

• On the highways — slow down.

• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmis-sion in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idlespeed.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow downan impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. TheA/C system adds heat to the engine cooling systemand turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.

• You can also turn the temperature control to maxi-mum heat, the mode control to floor and the blowercontrol to high. This allows the heater core to act as asupplement to the radiator and aids in removing heatfrom the engine cooling system.

200 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot enginecoolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. Ifyou see or hear steam coming from under the hood,do not open the hood until the radiator has had timeto cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressurecap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damageyour vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F(116°C) or greater pull over and stop the vehicle.Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned offuntil the coolant temperature drops back into thenormal range 200–230°F (93–110°C). The digitalwarning light may switch on (together with a mes-sage on the instrument cluster display) to indicatethat the coolant temperature is too high; in this case,stop the engine and call for service.

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensurethat the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Anytime a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on thevehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using aproperly calibrated torque wrench.

Torque Specifications

Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/Bolt Size

LugNut/BoltSocket

Size72 Ft-Lbs (98 N·m) M12 x 1.25 17 mm

**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lugnuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil beforetightening.

6

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 201

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mountingthe tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until eachnut/bolt has been tightened twice.

After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque tobe sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seatedagainst the wheel.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehiclehas been lowered. Failure to follow this warningmay result in personal injury.

Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns


TIRE SERVICE KIT

Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire treadcan be sealed with the Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects(e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from thetire. Tire Service Kit can be used in outside tempera-tures approximately from -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C).This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing youto drive your vehicle up to a maximum speed of 50 mph(80 km/h).

Storage Location

The Tire Service Kit is located in the rear storage areaunder the decklid.

Components And Operation

Tire Service Kit Components (Top View)

1 — Sealant Cartridge Receptacle2 — Pressure Gauge3 — Deflation Button4 — Power Button

6


Tire Service Kit Components (Bottom View)

1 — Power Plug2 — Air Pump Hose (Black)

Sealant Cartridge Components

1 — Sealant Hose (Clear)2 — Sealant Cartridge3 — Sealant Cartridge Inlet


Usage Precautions

• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Cartridge andSealant Hose prior to the expiration date (printed onthe left hand side of the cartridge label) to assureoptimum operation of the system.

• The Sealant Cartridge and Sealant Hose are a one tireapplication use and need to be replaced after eachuse. Always replace these components immediatelyat your authorized dealer.

• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,clean water, and a damp cloth will remove thematerial from the vehicle or tire and wheel compo-nents. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeledoff and properly discarded.

• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stemon the wheel is free of debris before connecting theTire Service Kit.

• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of thevehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off theroad to avoid the danger of being hit when usingthe Tire Service Kit.

• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicleunder the following circumstances:• If the puncture in the tire tread is approxi-

mately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.• If the tire has any sidewall damage.• If the tire has any damage from driving with

extremely low tire pressure.• If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat

tire.• If the wheel has any damage.• If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or

the wheel.• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or

heat sources.

(Continued)

6


WARNING! (Continued)• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a

collision or hard stop could endanger the occu-pants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire ServiceKit in the place provided. Failure to follow thesewarnings can result in injuries that are serious orfatal to you, your passengers, and others aroundyou.

• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire ServiceKit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. Itcauses skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flushimmediately with plenty of water if there is anycontact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soonas possible, if there is any contact with clothing.

• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. Incase of an allergic reaction or rash, consult aphysician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit outof reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouthimmediately with plenty of water and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consulta physician immediately.

Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit

1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’sHazard Warning flashers.

2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with thedeflated tire) is in a position that is near to theground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hosesand to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire ServiceKit flat on the ground. This will provide the bestpositioning of the kit when injecting the sealant intothe deflated tire and running the air pump. Move thevehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in thisposition before proceeding.

3. Place the transmission in PARK and place the igni-tion in the OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake.

5. Remove speed limit sticker off of the sealant car-tridge and place it inside the vehicle visually avail-able for the driver to see.


Setting Up To Use The Tire Service Kit

1. Push in the sealant cartridge inlet into the sealantcartridge receptacle.

2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose.

3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next tothe deflated tire.

4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screwthe fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose onto thevalve stem.

5. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into thevehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.

NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws ornails) from the tire.

Injecting Sealant Into The Tire

1. Always start the engine before turning on the TireService Kit.

2. After pushing the Power Button, the sealant (whitefluid) will flow from the sealant cartridge throughthe sealant hose and into the tire. As the sealant flowsthrough the sealant hose, the pressure gauge canread as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The pressure gauge

will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi(4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the sealantcartridge is empty.

NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture inthe tire.

3. The pump will start to inject air into the tire imme-diately after the sealant cartridge is empty. Continueto operate the pump and inflate the tire to thepressure indicated on the tire pressure label on thedriver-side latch pillar (recommended pressure).Check the tire pressure by looking at the pressuregauge.

NOTE:

• If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)pressure within 15 minutes the tire is too badlydamaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehiclefurther. Call for assistance.

• Do not let the compressor be turned on for morethan 20 consecutive minutes. The pump may over-heat.

4. Remove sealant cartridge by pushing the cartridgerelease button on the side of the compressor.

6


Drive Vehicle

Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating thetire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes toensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant withinthe tire. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

WARNING!

Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.Have the tire inspected and repaired or replacedafter using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph(80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced.Failure to follow this warning can result in injuriesthat are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, andothers around you.

After Driving

1. Attach the air pump hose (black) to the repaired tire.

2. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the pressuregauge. If the pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar), thetire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drivethe vehicle further. Call for assistance.

NOTE: A replacement sealant cartridge is available atyour authorized dealer.

JUMP-STARTING

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can bejump-started using a set of jumper cables and a batteryin another vehicle or by using a portable battery boosterpack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improp-erly so please follow the procedures in this sectioncarefully.

NOTE: When using a portable battery booster packfollow the manufacturer’s operating instructions andprecautions.

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is fro-zen. It could rupture or explode and cause personalinjury.

CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or anyother booster source with a system voltage greaterthan 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,alternator or electrical system may occur.


Preparations For Jump-Start

The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side ofthe engine compartment. To access the battery, removethe protective cover.

WARNING!

• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watchbands and bracelets that could make an inadver-tent electrical contact. You could be seriouslyinjured.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your

skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which isflammable and explosive. Keep open flames orsparks away from the battery.

NOTE: Be sure that the disconnected ends of the cablesdo not touch while still connected to the other vehicle.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake, and turn the ignitionOFF.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary elec-trical accessories.

3. To remove the protective cover off the battery, pullupward on the cover.

4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery,park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, setthe parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as thiscould establish a ground connection and personalinjury could result.

Battery Location

6


Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump-starting procedurecould result in personal injury or property damagedue to battery explosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result indamage to the charging system of the booster ve-hicle or the discharged vehicle.

Connecting The Jumper Cables

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable tothe positive (+) post of the vehicle with the dis-charged battery.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumpercable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable tothe negative (-) post of the booster battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumpercable to a good engine ground of the vehicle with the

Positive (+) Battery Post


discharged battery (exposed metal part of the en-gine) away from the battery and the fuel injectionsystem.

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)post of the discharged battery. The resulting elec-trical spark could cause the battery to explode andcould result in personal injury. Only use the spe-cific ground point, do not use any other exposedmetal parts.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the boosterbattery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and thenstart the engine in the vehicle with the dischargedbattery.

6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cablesin the reverse sequence:

Disconnecting The Jumper Cables

1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from theengine (-) ground of the vehicle with the dischargedbattery.

2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cablefrom the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the boosterbattery.

4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cablefrom the positive (+) post of the vehicle with thedischarged battery.

If frequent jump-starting is required to start your ve-hicle you should have the battery and charging systeminspected at your authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outletsdraw power from the vehicle’s battery, even whennot in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, ifplugged in long enough without engine operation,the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently todegrade battery life and/or prevent the engine fromstarting.

6


FRONT TOW EYE USAGE

Your vehicle is equipped with a tow eye that can beused to tow a disabled vehicle.

The front tow eye receptacle is located on the lowerright side of the front fascia.

To install the tow eye, thread the tow eye into thereceptacle.

NOTE: The front tow eye is found stored inside the TireService Kit storage bag.

When using a tow eye be sure to follow the “Tow EyeUsage Precautions” in this section.

Front Tow Eye Installed

Tow Eye


Tow Eye Usage Precautions

• Ensure that the tow eye is properly seated and securein the mounting receptacle.

• The tow eye is recommended for use with an ap-proved tow bar and or rope.

• Do not use the tow eye to pull the vehicle onto aflatbed truck.

• Do not use the tow eye to free a stuck vehicle.

WARNING!

Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow eyes.• Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains may

break, causing serious injury or death.• Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow straps

may break or become disengaged, causing seriousinjury or death.

• Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may causecomponents to break resulting in serious injuryor death.

CAUTION!

• The tow eye must be used exclusively for road-side assistance operations. Only use the tow eyewith an appropriate device in accordance with thehighway code (a rigid bar or rope) to flat tow thevehicle for a short distance to the nearest servicelocation.

• Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow vehicles offthe road or where there are obstacles.

(Continued)

Tow Eye Warning Label

6


CAUTION! (Continued)• In compliance with the above conditions, towing

with a tow eye must take place with two vehicles(one towing, the other towed) aligned as much aspossible along the same center line. Damage toyour vehicle may occur if these guidelines are notfollowed.

• When towing, only use a facility that can towvehicles with low ground clearances as extensivedamage can result by using a standard tow truckplatform.

FIRE EXTINGUISHER — IF EQUIPPED

The fire extinguisher is located under the dashboard infront of the passenger side seat.

ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM(EARS)

This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced AccidentResponse System.

Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “ThingsTo Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for furtherinformation on the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-tem (EARS) function.

Fire Extinguisher


EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, incertain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-formed.

Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “ThingsTo Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for furtherinformation on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).

6


MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS� ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1750 TURBO . . .219

� ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM —OBD II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

� EMISSIONS INSPECTION ANDMAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . .221

� REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

� DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

� MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . .223

▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

▫ Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .227

▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

▫ Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

▫ Windshield Washer Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . .230

▫ Adding Washer Solvent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231

▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233

▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235

▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240

▫ Alfa Twin Clutch Transmission . . . . . . . . . .243

▫ Appearance Care And ProtectionFrom Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244

� FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250

▫ Engine Compartment Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . .251

▫ Dashboard Fuse Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253

7

� VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254

� REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255

� BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256

▫ Front Light Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256

▫ Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260

▫ Rear Light Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261

▫ Direction Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261

▫ Tail Lights/Brake Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262

▫ Reversing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262

▫ Third Brake Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263

▫ License Plate Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264

▫ Roof Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265

▫ Luggage Compartment Roof Light . . . . . . . .266

� FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267

� FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, ANDGENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268

▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268

▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269

218 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1750 TURBO

1 — Fuse Box 3 — Engine Oil Dip Stick 5 — Coolant Reservoir2 — Battery 4 — Engine Oil Fill

7

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 219

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboarddiagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitorsthe performance of the emissions, engine, and AlfaTwin Clutch Transmission control systems. When thesesystems are operating properly, your vehicle will pro-vide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well asengine emissions well within current government regu-lations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD IIsystem will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL)”. It will also store diagnostic codes and otherinformation to assist your service technician in makingrepairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivableand not need towing, see your authorized dealer forservice as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could causefurther damage to the emission control system. Itcould also affect fuel economy and driveability.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)The vehicle must be serviced before any emis-sions tests can be performed.

• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,severe catalytic converter damage and power losswill soon occur. Immediate service is required.

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)Cybersecurity

Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnosticsystem (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access toinformation related to the performance of your emis-sions controls. Authorized service technicians may needto access this information to assist with the diagnosisand service of your vehicle and emissions system.

WARNING!

• ONLY an authorized service technician shouldconnect equipment to the OBD II connection portin order to diagnose or service your vehicle.

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued)• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the

OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behaviortracking device, it may:• Be possible that vehicle systems, including

safety related systems, could be impaired or aloss of vehicle control could occur that mayresult in an accident involving serious injury ordeath.

• Access, or allow others to access, informationstored in your vehicle systems, including per-sonal information.

For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in the“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” section.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCEPROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to passan inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control sys-tem. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Main-tenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunc-tion Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is

not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD IIsystem is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD IIsystem may not be ready if your vehicle was recentlyserviced, or recently had a dead battery or a batteryreplacement. If the OBD II system should be deter-mined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may failthe test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, whichyou can use prior to going to the test station. To checkif your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must dothe following:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON mode, but do not crankor start the engine.

NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have tostart this test over.

2. As soon as you cycle the ignition to the ON mode,you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.

7


3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two thingswill happen:

• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and thenreturn to being fully illuminated until you cycle theignition OFF or start the engine. This means that yourvehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you shouldnot proceed to the I/M station.

• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fullyilluminated until you place the ignition in the offposition or start the engine. This means that yourvehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceedto the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see yourauthorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle wasrecently serviced or had a battery failure or replace-ment, you may need to do nothing more than driveyour vehicle as you normally would in order for yourOBD II system to update. A recheck with the above testroutine may then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system isready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal

vehicle operation you should have your vehicle ser-viced before going to the I/M station. The I/M stationcan fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with theengine running.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled mainte-nance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure thedesigned performance. Damage or failures caused bythe use of parts which are not quality-equivalent togenuine parts for maintenance and repairs will not becovered by the manufacturer’s warranty.

DEALER SERVICE

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all serviceoperations in an expert manner. Service Manuals areavailable which include detailed service information foryour vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals beforeattempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions controlsystems may void your warranty and could result incivil penalties being assessed against you.


WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around amotor vehicle. Only do service work for which youhave the knowledge and the proper equipment. Ifyou have any doubt about your ability to perform aservice job, take your vehicle to a competent me-chanic.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

The pages that follow contain the required maintenanceservices determined by the engineers who designedyour vehicle.

Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixedmaintenance schedule, there are other componentswhich may require servicing or replacement in thefuture.

CAUTION!

• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-form repairs and service when necessary couldresult in more costly repairs, damage to other

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-mance. Immediately have potential malfunctionsexamined by an authorized dealer or qualifiedrepair center.

• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluidsthat protect the performance and durability ofyour vehicle and also allow extended mainte-nance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes inthese components as the chemicals can damageyour engine, transmission, or air conditioning.Such damage is not covered by the New VehicleLimited Warranty. If a flush is needed because ofcomponent malfunction, use only the specifiedfluid for the flushing procedure.

Engine Oil

Checking Oil Level

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil mustbe maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level atregular intervals. The best time to check the engine oillevel is before starting the engine after it has satovernight.

7


Do not check oil level when the engine is warm.Checking engine oil level when the engine is warm willgive you an incorrect reading.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground,and has sat overnight, will improve the accuracy of theoil level readings. Maintain the oil level between therange markings on the dipstick. The safe range isindicated by a crosshatch zone. Adding 1 quart of oilwhen the reading is at the low end of the indicatedrange will result in the oil level at the full end of theindicator range.

CAUTION!

Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling theengine with oil will cause oil aeration, which canlead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oiltemperature. This loss of oil pressure and increasedoil temperature could damage your engine.

Change Engine Oil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that itis time to take your vehicle in for scheduled mainte-nance. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for furtherinformation.

NOTE: The actual interval for changing the oil andreplacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicleusage conditions and is signalled by the warning lightor message (if present) on the instrument panel or every12 months.

Engine Oil Selection

For best performance and maximum protection forturbocharged engines under all types of operatingconditions, the manufacturer recommends syntheticengine oils that are API Certified and meet the require-ments of FCA Material Standard MS-12991.

Engine Oil Viscosity — 1750 Turbo Engine(SAE Grade)

SAE 5W-40 full synthetic engine oil is recommended forall operating temperatures. This engine oil improveslow temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oilcertification mark and the correct SAE viscosity gradenumber should not be used.

Materials Added To Engine Oil

The manufacturer strongly recommends against theaddition of any additives (other than leak detection


dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineeredproduct and its performance may be impaired bysupplemental additives.

Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oiland oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem tothe environment. Contact your authorized dealer, ser-vice station or governmental agency for advice on howand where used oil and oil filters can be safely dis-carded in your area.

Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filterat every engine oil change.

Engine Oil Filter Selection

This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dis-posable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace-ment. The quality of replacement filters varies consid-erably. Only high quality filters should be used toassure most efficient service. MOPAR engine oil filtersare high quality oil filters and are recommended.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the propermaintenance intervals.

WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.)can provide a measure of protection in the case ofengine backfire. Do not remove the air inductionsystem (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removalis necessary for repair or maintenance. Make surethat no one is near the engine compartment beforestarting the vehicle with the air induction system(air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do socan result in serious personal injury.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filtersvaries considerably. Only high quality filters should beused to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine aircleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-mended.

7


Engine Cover

To avoid possible damage to the engine cover, pleasedisconnect each of the four mounting studs by pullingthe engine cover upward, and then lift off the completecover. Tilting the engine cover when one or more studsare still engaged will lead to premature failure of thecouplers.

To reassemble the cover back onto the engine, first makesure it is properly aligned, the oil cap is centered, andthat all four studs are lined up with their couplers. Thengently push on the four corners of the engine cover tosnap the stud back into position.

No tools are required to remove or reassemble theengine cover.

Maintenance-Free Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free bat-tery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodicmaintenance required.

WARNING!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and canburn or even blind you. Do not allow batteryfluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Donot lean over a battery when attaching clamps. Ifacid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the areaimmediately with large amounts of water. Referto “Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do InEmergencies” for further information.

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keepflame or sparks away from the battery. Do not usea booster battery or any other booster source withan output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allowcable clamps to touch each other.

• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds. Wash handsafter handling.

• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose thatshould not be disconnected and should only bereplaced with a battery of the same type (vented).


CAUTION!

• It is essential when replacing the cables on thebattery that the positive cable is attached to thepositive post and the negative cable is attached tothe negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on thebattery case. Cable clamps should be tight on theterminal posts and free of corrosion.

• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is inthe vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cablesbefore connecting the charger to the battery. Donot use a “fast charger” to provide starting volt-age.

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditionershould be checked and serviced by an authorized dealerat the start of each warm season. This service shouldinclude cleaning of the condenser fins and a perfor-mance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked atthis time.

NOTE:

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioningsystem. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-mable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap-proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the sys-tem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to WarrantyInformation Book, located on the USB card, forfurther warranty information.

• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant un-der high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury ordamage to the system, adding refrigerant or anyrepair requiring lines to be disconnected should bedone by an experienced technician.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your air condition-ing system as the chemicals can damage your airconditioning components. Such damage is not cov-ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

7


Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf

HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-fluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environ-mental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving prod-uct with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential).However, the manufacturer recommends that air con-ditioning service be performed by authorized dealer orother service facilities using recovery and recyclingequipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C systemPAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.

Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items asseat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, shouldbe lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easyoperation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior tothe application of any lubricant, the parts concernedshould be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; afterlubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.

Particular attention should also be given to hood latch-ing components to ensure proper function. When per-forming other underhood services, the hood latch,release mechanism and safety catch should be cleanedand lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice ayear, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a smallamount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPARLock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

Wiper Blades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades, the wind-shield, and rear window periodically with a sponge orsoft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This willremove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, andhelp reduce streaking and smearing.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periodsmay cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Alwaysuse washer fluid when using the wipers to remove saltor dirt from a dry windshield or rear window.


Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or icefrom the windshield or rear window. Make sure thatthey are not frozen to the glass before turning them onto avoid damaging the blade. Keep the wiper blade outof contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poorperformance of blades may be present with chattering,marks, water lines, or wet spots. If any of these condi-tions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace asnecessary.

Blade Lifting

If it is necessary to lift the blade from the windshield (Inthe event of snow or blade replacement) Proceed asdirected:

1. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the OFFposition.

2. Turn the ignition to the MAR-ON position then toSTOP.

3. After turning the ignition to the STOP, within twominutes move the right stalk upward, into the un-stable (“anti-panic”) position, for at least half of asecond. The windshield wiper then executes part of astroke; at each command, approximately 1/3 of anormal wiper stroke is triggered.

NOTE: The previous operation can be repeated up tothree times. In order to move the blades to the mostsuitable position.

4. Lift the blade from the windshield and proceed withthe required operation.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever7


5. Carefully lower the blade, bringing it back in contactwith the windshield.

6. Bring the blade to the initial rest position, turning theignition to MAR-ON.

NOTE: Do not operate the screen wiper with the bladeslifted from the windshield.

Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiperblade off of the windshield.

2. Push the release button on the arm of the wiperblade.

3. Push the wiper blade up and remove it.

4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the wiperblade until it snaps into place.

Windshield Washer Nozzles

The windshield washer nozzles are adjustable. Theyoriginally adjusted at the factory. Should it be necessaryto adjust them again, contact your authorized AlfaRomeo Dealer.

1 — Wiper Blade2 — Release Button3 — Wiper Arm


If there is not a jet of fluid, first check that there is fluidin the washer reservoir. Refer to “Adding WasherSolvent” in this section for further information.

Then check that the nozzle holes are not clogged; use asuitable tool such as a needle to unblock them ifnecessary.

Adding Washer Solvent

To check the windshield washer solvent level, proceedas follows:

1. To avoid any interference during the procedure, liftthe windshield wiper blade.

2. Loosen the four screws using the supplied screw-driver. Remove the washer solvent protection panel.

3. Release the plug from the opening.

4. Leaving the plug close to the opening, put a finger onthe central hole in the plug and remove it: the levelcan be seen on the control pipe due to capillarity.

1 — Brake Fluid Access Panel2 — Washer Solvent Access Panel

1 — Screw Locations

7


5. After the check, reinsert the plug with the controlpipe in the initial position.

6. Reposition the washer solvent protection panel andtighten the four self-tapping screws.

If the level is not sufficient, namely if there is no washersolvent inside the pipe, proceed as follows:

1. To avoid any interference during the procedure, liftthe windshield wiper blade.

2. Loosen the four screws using the supplied screw-driver. Remove the washer solvent protection panel.

3. Take the black funnel for topping up the windshieldwasher solvent and its extension pipe from theservice kit in the luggage compartment.

4. Take out the plug with the solvent control pipethrough the washer solvent protection panel.

5. Introduce the funnel and its extension pipe in thereservoir neck and top up.

Washer Solvent Plug

Washer Solvent Dip Stick


6. After topping up, remove the funnel with the exten-sion pipe.

7. Refit the plug with the dipstick.

8. Reposition the washer solvent protection panel andtighten the four self-tapping screws.

WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washer sol-vents are flammable. They could ignite and burnyou. Care must be exercised when filling or work-ing around the washer solution.

Exhaust System

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry intothe vehicle body is a properly maintained engine ex-haust system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaustsystem; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected insidethe vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicleis damaged; have an authorized technician inspect thecomplete exhaust system and adjacent body areas forbroken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaustfumes to seep into the passenger compartment. Inaddition, have the exhaust system inspected each timethe vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.Replace as required.

Washer Solvent Fill Funnel7


WARNING!

• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They containcarbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless andodorless. Breathing it can make you unconsciousand can eventually poison you. To avoid breath-ing CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”for further information.

• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you parkover materials that can burn. Such materialsmight be grass or leaves coming into contact withyour exhaust system. Do not park or operate yourvehicle in areas where your exhaust system cancontact anything that can burn.

CAUTION!

• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy theeffectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con-trol device and may seriously reduce engine per-formance and cause serious damage to the engine.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if

your vehicle is not kept in proper operatingcondition. In the event of engine malfunction,particularly involving engine misfire or otherapparent loss of performance, have your vehicleserviced promptly. Continued operation of yourvehicle with a severe malfunction could cause theconverter to overheat, resulting in possible dam-age to the converter and vehicle.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-verter will not require maintenance. However, it isimportant to keep the engine properly tuned to assureproper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalystdamage.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions controlsystems can result in civil penalties being assessedagainst you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioningengine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severeand abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop


the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifi-cations, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-age:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is inmotion.

• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towingthe vehicle.

• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wiresdisconnected or removed, such as when diagnostictesting, or for prolonged periods during very roughidle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

Cooling System

WARNING!

• Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fan motorlead before working near the radiator cooling fan.

• You or others can be badly burned by hot enginecoolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)you see or hear steam coming from under thehood, do not open the hood until the radiator hashad time to cool. Never open a cooling systempressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle ishot.

• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry awayfrom the radiator cooling fan when the hood israised. The fan starts automatically and may startat any time, whether the engine is running or not.

• When working near the radiator cooling fan,disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignitionswitch to the OFF position. The fan is temperaturecontrolled and can start at any time the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

• You or others can be badly burned by hot enginecoolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. Ifyou see or hear steam coming from under thehood, do not open the hood until the radiator hashad time to cool. Never try to open a coolingsystem pressure cap when the radiator is hot.

7


Coolant Checks

Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, whereapplicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty orrusty in appearance, the system should be drained,flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for anyaccumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean bygently spraying water from a garden hose verticallydown the face of the condenser.

Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill

NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to addcoolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properlycould lead to severe internal engine damage. If anycoolant is needed to be added to the system, pleasecontact your local authorized dealer.

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or containsvisible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean andflush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming toMS.90032).

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the propermaintenance intervals.

Selection Of Coolant

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other thanspecified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in enginedamage and may decrease corrosion protection.Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-ant is different and should not be mixed withHybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT)engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally com-patible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT enginecoolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the coolingsystem in an emergency, the cooling system willneed to be drained, flushed, and refilled withfresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), byan authorized dealer as soon as possible.

(Continued)


CAUTION! (Continued)• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine

coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as theymay not be compatible with the engine coolantand may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use withpropylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-freeze). Use of propylene glycol-based enginecoolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

Adding Coolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved enginecoolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) thatallows extended maintenance intervals. This enginecoolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To pre-vent reducing this extended maintenance period, it isimportant that you use the same engine coolant (OATcoolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life ofyour vehicle.

Please review these recommendations for using Or-ganic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (anti-freeze) that meets the requirements of FCA MaterialStandard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (anti-freeze):

• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Addi-tive Technology) that meets the requirements of FCAMaterial Standard MS.90032.

• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolantthat meets the requirements of FCA Material Stan-dard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher con-centrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below−34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact yourauthorized dealer for assistance.

• Use only high purity water such as distilled ordeionized water when mixing the water/enginecoolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower qualitywater will reduce the amount of corrosion protectionin the engine cooling system.

7


NOTE:

• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the properlevel of protection against freezing according to thetemperatures occurring in the area where the vehicleis operated.

• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolantproperly. Failure to fill these systems properly couldlead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolantis needed to be added to the system, please contactyour local authorized dealer.

• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not rec-ommended and can result in cooling system damage.If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emer-gency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, andrefill with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) assoon as possible.

Cooling System Pressure Cap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss ofengine coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that enginecoolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from thecoolant recovery tank.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is anyaccumulation of foreign material on the sealing sur-faces.

WARNING!

• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Neveradd engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engineis overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap tocool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressureto build up in the cooling system. To preventscalding or injury, do not remove the pressure capwhile the system is hot or under pressure.

• Do not use a pressure cap other than the onespecified for your vehicle. Personal injury orengine damage may result.

Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant

Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.Check with your local authorities to determine thedisposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestionby animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to


remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a childor pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Cleanup any ground spills immediately.

Coolant Level

The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visualmethod for determining that the coolant level is ad-equate. With the engine off and cold, the level of theengine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should bebetween the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.

As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once amonth.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is neededto maintain the proper level, it should be added to thecoolant bottle. Do not overfill.

Points To Remember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor comingfrom the front of the engine compartment. This isnormally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or highhumidity accumulating on the radiator and being va-porized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot en-gine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment showsno evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle maybe safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.

• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and inthe coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolantexpansion bottle must also be protected against freez-ing.

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions arerequired, the cooling system should be pressuretested for leaks.

• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration ata minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming toMS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosionprotection of your engine which contains aluminumcomponents.

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle isequipped with air conditioning, keep the front of thecondenser clean.

• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winteroperation. If replacement is ever necessary, installONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs

7


may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (anti-freeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increasedemissions.

Brake System

In order to assure brake system performance, all brakesystem components should be inspected periodically.Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the propermaintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure andpossibly a collision. Driving with your foot restingor riding on the brake pedal can result in abnor-mally high brake temperatures, excessive liningwear, and possible brake damage. Riding thebrakes may also reduce braking capacity in anemergency.

Brake Master Cylinder

The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checkedwhen performing under hood services, or immediatelyif the “Brake Warning Light” is on.

Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder areabefore removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bringthe fluid level up to the requirements described on thebrake fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fallas the brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should bechecked when the pads are replaced. However, lowfluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup maybe needed.

Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING!

• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brakefluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And GenuineParts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for furtherinformation. Using the wrong type of brake fluidcan severely damage your brake system and/orimpair its performance. The proper type of brakefluid for your vehicle is also identified on theoriginal factory installed hydraulic master cylin-der reservoir.

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued)• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or

moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid thathas been in a tightly closed container. Keep themaster cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisturefrom the air resulting in a lower boiling point.This may cause it to boil unexpectedly duringhard or prolonged braking, resulting in suddenbrake failure. This could result in a collision.

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result inspilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causingthe brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can alsodamage painted and vinyl surfaces, care shouldbe taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

• Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contami-nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components couldbe damaged, causing partial or complete brakefailure. This could result in a collision.

CAUTION!

Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutchsystem performance. Improper brake fluids may dam-age the clutch system resulting in loss of clutchfunction and the ability to shift the transmission.

Checking Brake Fluid

1 — Brake Fluid Protection Panel2 — Washer Solvent Protection Panel

7


To check the brake fluid level, proceed as follows:

1. Loosen the two screws and remove the brake fluidprotection panel.

2. Check that the fluid is at the max. level.

3. After checking, reposition the brake fluid protectionpanel and tighten the two screws.

Adding Brake Fluid

If the fluid level in the reservoir is not sufficient,proceed as follows:

1. Take the black funnel for topping up the brake fluidand its extension pipe from the service kit in theluggage compartment.

2. Loosen the reservoir plug and introduce the funnelwith the extension pipe in the reservoir inlet.

Brake Fluid Protection Panel

1 — Screw Locations

Brake Fluid Funnel


3. After topping up, remove the funnel with the exten-sion pipe.

4. Tighten the reservoir plug.

5. Reposition the brake fluid protection panel andtighten the two screws.

NOTE: Be very careful while removing the plug fromthe opening to prevent the plug from falling inside thevehicle body.

Alfa Twin Clutch Transmission

Selection Of Lubricant

It is important to use the proper transmission fluid toensure optimum transmission performance and life.Use only the manufacturer’s specified transmissionfluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts”in this section for fluid specifications. It is important tomaintain the transmission fluid at the correct levelusing the recommended fluid. No chemical flushesshould be used in any transmission; only the approvedlubricant should be used.

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-turer’s recommended fluid may cause deteriorationin transmission shift quality. Refer to “Fluids, Lu-bricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section forfluid specifications.

Special Additives

The manufacturer strongly recommends against usingany special additives in the transmission.

Transmission fluid is an engineered product and itsperformance may be impaired by supplemental addi-tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to thetransmission. The only exception to this policy is theuse of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission asthe chemicals can damage your transmission com-ponents. Such damage is not covered by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

7


Fluid Level Check

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does notrequire adjustment under normal operating conditions.Frequent fluid level checks are not required, but haveyour authorized dealer check the fluid level as specifiedin the Maintenance Schedule to ensure proper transmis-sion function and longevity. The transmission has nodipstick, but your authorized dealer can check yourtransmission fluid level using special service tools. Ifyou notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,visit your authorized dealer immediately to have thetransmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehiclewith an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis-sion damage.

Fluid Changes

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installedat the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication forthe life of the vehicle. However, change the fluid if itbecomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if thetransmission is disassembled for any reason.

Appearance Care And Protection FromCorrosion

Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roadspassable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed ontrees and road surfaces during other seasons are highlycorrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extremehot or cold weather and other extreme conditions willhave an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-body protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will en-able you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosionresistance built into your vehicle.

What Causes Corrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal ofpaint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.

• Stone and gravel impact.


• Insects, tree sap and tar.

• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash yourvehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or amild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completelywith clear water.

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bugand Tar Remover to remove.

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPARCleaner Wax to remove road film, stains, and toprotect your paint finish. Take care never to scratchthe paint.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffingthat may diminish the gloss or thin out the paintfinish.

NOTE: Hand washing is recommended. Avoid washingwith power washers and do not use commercial carwash facilities.

CAUTION!

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materialssuch as steel wool or scouring powder that willscratch metal and painted surfaces.

• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

• If the engine compartment is washed with anhigh pressure jet, keep it at a distance of at least8 inches (20 centimeters) from filler surface.

• Do not run this vehicle through an Automatic CarWash facility as extensive damage can result dueto the vehicle’s low ground clearance.

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads, or if you drivenear the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at leastonce a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edgesof the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clearand open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairsis considered the responsibility of the owner.

7


• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision orsimilar cause that destroys the paint and protectivecoating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-sible. The cost of such repairs is considered theresponsibility of the owner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertiliz-ers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials arewell packaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, considermud or stone shields behind each wheel.

• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon aspossible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paintto match the color of your vehicle.

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum andchrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularlyusing mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintaintheir luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels withthe same soap solution recommended for the body ofthe vehicle.

Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused bysalt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calciumchloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice

or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or spongeand mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harshchemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’sprotective coating that helps keep them from corrodingand tarnishing.

NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strongacids or strong alkaline additives that can harm thewheel surface.

CAUTION!

Avoid products or automatic car washes that useacidic solutions or strong alkaline additives orharsh brushes. These products and automatic carwashes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.Such damage is not covered by the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPARWheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.

When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection oftire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment toprevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment,Mopar Chrome Cleaner, or their equivalent is recom-mended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for


aluminum or chrome wheels. Do not use any productson Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They willpermanently damage this finish and such damage is notcovered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristlebrush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These prod-ucts may damage the wheel’s protective finish.Such damage is not covered by the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPARWheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.

NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle foran extended period after cleaning the wheels withwheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutesbefore doing so. Driving the vehicle and applying thebrakes when stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotorcorrosion.

Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels

CAUTION!

If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor orBlack Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheelcleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. Theywill permanently damage this finish and such dam-age is not covered by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATERWITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis;this is all that is required to maintain this finish.

Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —If Equipped

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the followingmanner:

• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blottingwith a clean, dry towel.

• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or amild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and removestain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soapresidue.

7


• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-PurposeCleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Usea fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form ofprotectants on Stain Repel products.

Interior Care

Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery andcarpeting.

Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.

MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended forleather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regularcleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt canact as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery andshould be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stub-born soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth andMOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoidsoaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Pleasedo not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leatherupholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is notrequired to maintain the original condition.

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.Many are potentially flammable, and if used inclosed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

CAUTION!

• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior maycause permanent damage. Wipe away immedi-ately.

• Damage caused by these type of products may notbe covered by your New Vehicle Limited War-ranty.

• Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/orKeton based cleaning products to clean leatherseats, as damage to the seat may result.


Cleaning Headlights

Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter andless susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and thereforedifferent lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses andreducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. Toremove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solutionfollowed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,steel wool or other aggressive material to clean thelenses.

Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basiswith MOPAR, or any commercial household-type glasscleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use cautionwhen cleaning the inside rear window equipped. Donot use scrapers or other sharp instrument that mayscratch the elements.

Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water(if equipped), keep all objects a safe distance from thewindows.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner onthe towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spraycleaner directly on the mirror.

Instrument Panel Cover

The instrument panel cover has a low glare surfacewhich minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do notuse protectants or other products which may causeundesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water torestore the low glare surface.

Instrument Panel Bezels

CAUTION!

When installing hanging air fresheners in yourvehicle, read the installation instructions carefully.Some air fresheners will damage the finish ofpainted or decorated parts if allowed to directlycontact any surface.

7


Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle aremolded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, caremust be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solutionmay be used, but do not use high alcohol content orabrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with aclean damp cloth.

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemicalsolvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken thefabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution orlukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from thevehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if thebuckles do not work properly.

NOTE: If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upperturning loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean witha wet soft cloth until all residue is removed.

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collisionand leave you with no protection. Inspect the beltsystem periodically, checking for cuts, frays, orloose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-diately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a colli-sion if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,torn webbing, etc.).

FUSES

WARNING!

• When replacing a blown fuse, always use anappropriate replacement fuse with the same amprating as the original fuse. Never replace a fusewith another fuse of higher amp rating. Neverreplace a blown fuse with metal wires or anyother material. Failure to use proper fuses mayresult in serious personal injury, fire and/or prop-erty damage.

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued)• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the igni-

tion is off and that all the other services areswitched off and/or disengaged.

• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an au-thorized dealer.

• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (airbag system, braking system), power unit systems(engine system, gearbox system) or steering sys-tem blows, contact an authorized dealer.

Engine Compartment Fuses

The engine compartment fuse box is located on the leftside of the engine compartment, next to the battery. Toaccess the fuses, remove screws, and then remove thecover.

The ID number of the electrical component correspond-ing to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.

Engine Compartment Fuse Box

1 — Forward Screw2 — Fuse Box Cover3 — Rearward Screw

7


Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse DescriptionF01 70 Amp Tan – Body ControllerF03 20 Amp Yellow – Ignition SwitchF04 40 Amp Orange – Anti-Lock Brake PumpF05 20 Amp Yellow – Anti-Lock Brake ValveF06 40 Amp Orange – Radiator Fan - Low SpeedF07 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan - High SpeedF08 20 Amp Yellow – Blower MotorF09 – 5 Amp Tan Headlight Beam Switch – If EquippedF10 – 10 Amp Red HornF11 – 20 Amp Yellow PowertrainF14 – 15 Amp Blue Alfa Twin Clutch TransmissionF15 – 15 Amp Blue Alfa Twin Clutch TransmissionF16 – 5 Amp Tan Alfa Twin Clutch Transmission, ECMF17 – 10 Amp Red PowertrainF18 – 5 Amp Tan PowertrainF19 – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning CompressorF21 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel PumpF22 – 20 Amp Yellow Engine Control Unit Power SupplyF23 – 25 Amp Clear Alpine Amplifier – If EquippedF24 – 5 Amp Tan Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)


Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse DescriptionF30 – 10 Amp Red Water Pump, HVACF82 30 Amp Green – Headlamp Washer – If EquippedF83 40 Amp Orange – Alfa Twin Clutch Transmission PumpF84 – 5 Amp Tan After Run PumpF86 – 15 Amp Blue Rear Power Outlet 12VF88 – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Mirrors

Dashboard Fuse Box

The dashboard fuse box is part of the Body ControlModule (BCM) and is located on the passenger sideunder the forward passenger floor. Remove the sixscrews and the forward floor pan to access the BCM.

CavityVehicle Fuse

NumberMini Fuse Description

3 F53 7.5 Amp Brown Instrument Panel Node4 F38 15 Amp Blue Central Door Locking5 F36 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Socket, Vehicle Radio, TPMS, Alarm6 F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-Directional Washer7 F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Window9 F50 7.5 Amp Brown Airbag

7


CavityVehicle Fuse

NumberMini Fuse Description

10 F51 7.5 Amp Brown Headlamp Washer Relay, A/C Compressor Relay,High Beam Relay, Parking ECU, Vehicle Radio,Stop Lamp Switch

11 F37 7.5 Amp Brown Stop Light Switch, Instrument Panel Node12 F49 5 Amp Tan Transmission Shifter Module, Cigar Lighter Light,

Drive Style Unit, Heated Mirrors Relay13 F31 5 Amp Tan Climate Control, Body Controller14 F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Window

VEHICLE STORAGE

If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than21 days, you may want to take these steps to protectyour battery.

• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out ofservice (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run theair conditioning system at idle for about five minutesin the fresh air and high blower setting. This willensure adequate system lubrication to minimize thepossibility of compressor damage when the system isstarted again.


REPLACEMENT BULBS

Interior Bulbs

Bulb NumberOverhead Lamp C10WLuggage Compartment W5W

Exterior Bulbs

Bulb NumberParking Lights/DaytimeRunning Lights (DRL)

LED(See Authorized Dealer)

Rear Tail Lights LED(See Authorized Dealer)

Font and Rear SideLights

W3W

Dipped/Main BeamHeadlights (VersionsWith Bi-Halogen Head-lights) — If Equipped

HIR2

Dipped/Main BeamHeadlights (VersionsWith Bi-Xenon Head-lights) — If Equipped

D5S(See Authorized Dealer)

Bulb NumberDipped/Main BeamHeadlights (VersionsWith Bi-Led Headlights)— If Equipped

LED(See Authorized Dealer)

Front Direction Indica-tors

PY24W

Rear Direction Indicators P21WSide Direction Indicators WY5WBrake Lights LED

(See Authorized Dealer)Third Brake Light LED

(See Authorized Dealer)License Plate Lamps W5WReversing light W16W

NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb typesthat can be purchased from your authorized dealer.If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorizeddealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.

7


BULB REPLACEMENT

NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmo-spheric conditions change to allow the condensation tochange back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on willusually accelerate the clearing process.

Front Light Clusters

The front head lamp contains bulbs for the parkinglights/daytime running lights (DRL), low beam head-lights, high beam headlights and direction indicators.

If bulb replacement is required, please see an autho-rized dealer.

Side Lights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

These are LEDs. For the replacement, contact the yourauthorized dealer.

1 — Daytime Running Lights2 — Direction Indicator3 — High/Low Beam Lights


Low/High Beam Bi-Halogen Headlights

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

1. Turn the steering wheel completely.

2. Open the protective flap by rotating the screw.

3. Remove protective cover from headlamp assembly.

1 — Direction Indicator Bulb Protective Flap2 — Headlamp Bulb Protective Flap

Protective Cover

7


4. Remove the electric connector (1) and then rotate thebulb holder (2) clockwise and remove it.

5. Extract the bulb and replace it.

6. Refit the new bulb, making sure that it is lockedcorrectly, and reconnect the electrical connector.

7. Reinstall protective cover in the headlamp assemblyand close the protective flap.

Low/High Beam HID & LED Headlights

For the replacement, contact the your authorized dealer.

Direction Indicators

Front:

1. Turn the steering wheel completely.

2. Open the protective flap by rotating the screw.

1 — Electrical Connector2 — Bulb Holder

1 — Direction Indicator Bulb Protective Flap2 — Headlamp Bulb Protective Flap


3. Remove protective cover from headlamp assembly.

4. Rotate the bulb holder counterclockwise and removeit.

5. Rotate the bulb assembly counter clockwise to re-move from bulb holder.

6. Install the new bulb, making sure that it is locked incorrectly, and reinstall into headlamp assembly.

7. Reinstall protective cover in the headlamp assemblyand close the protective flap.

Side:

1. Adjust the lens in the point shown in to compress theretaining clip, then pull the cluster outwards.

2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise, remove thebulb and replace it.

3. Install the bulb holder in the lens and turn it clock-wise.

4. Install the cluster making sure that the internal clipclicks into position.

Protective Cover

1 — Lens2 — Bulb Holder

7


Front Side Marker


1. Turn the front wheels to gain access and then removethe fastener from the inner wheel liner.

2. Fold back wheel liner door to access bulb housing.

Fastener Location

Bulb Housing Location


3. Remove bulb from bulb housing then remove andreplace bulb and reinstall.

Rear Light Clusters

These contain the bulbs for the side lights, directionindicators and brake lights.

Direction Indicators


1. Remove the protective cap (one for each side) on theside cover of the luggage compartment.

2. Remove the second protective cap insert a handinside the opening.

Front Side Marker Bulb

First Protective Cap

7


3. Rotate clockwise to remove the bulb holder removethe bulb from the bulb holder.

4. Install the bulb by pressing it into bulb holder thenturn install the bulb holder and turn it counterclock-wise.

5. Install the previously removed protective caps.

Tail Lights/Brake Lights

These are LEDs. For the replacement, contact the yourlocal dealer.

Reversing Light

WARNING!

The reversing light are located close to the exhaustpipes; take the utmost care not to get burnt duringthe bulb replacement.

Second Protective Cap


To replace the reversing lights, turn the bulb holdercounterclockwise, remove the bulb and replace it.

Third Brake Lights

These are LEDs. For the replacement, contact your localdealer.

1 — Reverse Light Location2 — Reverse Light Location

Reversing Light Bulb Holder7


License Plate Lights

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

1. Position the lens in the point shown laterally tocompress the retaining clip, then pull the licenseplate light cluster out.

2. Turn bulb holder (1) counterclockwise, remove bulb(2) and replace it.

License Plate Lamp Removal

1 — Bulb Holder2 — Bulb


Roof Light


1. Remove roof light working at the points indicated bythe arrows.

2. Open protective flap (2) and replace bulb (1), releas-ing it from the side contacts. Make sure that the newbulb is correctly secured between the contacts.

3. Close protective flap (2) and install roof light in itshousing, making sure that it is locked in place.

Roof Light

1 — Bulb2 — Protective Flap

7


Luggage Compartment Roof Light

To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:

1. Open the luggage compartment and remove luggagecompartment roof light, working in the directionshown by the arrow.

2. Open light protector (2) and replace the bulb.

3. Close protector on the lens.

4. Install luggage compartment roof light by inserting itin its correct position, first on one side and thenpressing on the other side until it clicks into place.

1 — Light Cover2 — Light Protector


FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S. MetricFuel (Approximate)1750 Turbo Engine 10.5 Gallons 40 LitersReserve Fuel 1.1 Gallons 4 LitersEngine Oil with Filter1750 Turbo Engine 6.1 Quarts 5.8 LitersCooling System1750 Turbo Engine (MOPARAntifreeze/Engine Coolant 10Year/150,000 Mile Formula).

11.2 Quarts 10.6 Liters 7


FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTSEngine

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine PartEngine Coolant – 1750 Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant

10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic AdditiveTechnology) or equivalent meeting the requirements ofFCA Material Standard MS.90032.

Engine Oil – 1750 Turbo Engine We recommend you use SAE 5W-40 API CertifiedSynthetic Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCAMaterial Standard MS-12991.

Engine Oil Filter – 1750 Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.Spark Plugs – 1750 Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs. *Fuel Selection – 1750 Turbo Engine Use Only 91 Octane or higher, 0-10% Ethanol.

NOTE: * The following are essential to ensure correctoperation and prevent serious damage to the engine:only use spark plugs of the same make and type, whichare specially certified for such engines that strictlycomply with the spark plug replacement interval givenin the maintenance schedule. For spark plug replace-ment, it is advisable to contact the dedicated AlfaRomeo Dealership. Refer to the “Maintenance Sched-ule” section for the required spark plug intervals.


Chassis

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine PartAlfa Twin Clutch Transmission • Gearbox: Full synthetic 75W-85 manual transmission fluid meeting

MS.90021 or FPW9.55550–MZ3 or the API GL4 specification.• Control System: Use only MOPAR C Series DDCT SAE 75W Hydrau-

lic Fluid or equivalent.Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance ofyour transmission.

Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 4 meeting MS.90039. If DOT 4 brakefluid is not available, then DOT 3 is acceptable.DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every two years regardless of mileage.

7


MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

CONTENTS� MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . .272 ▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274

8

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil changeindicator system. The oil change indicator system willremind you that it is time to take your vehicle in forscheduled maintenance.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil changeindicator message will illuminate in the instrumentcluster. This means that an engine oil and engine oilfilter change is required for your vehicle. Operatingconditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow,extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influ-ence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required”message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions cancause the change oil message to illuminate as early as3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have yourvehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500miles (805 km).

The Wrench Warning Light may appear in the cluster asa service reminder when vehicle maintenance is re-quired, according to the scheduled maintenance mile-age. The maintenance schedule intervals are set by themanufacturer. Failure to have them carried out mayvoid your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

NOTE: The actual interval for changing the oil andreplacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicleusage conditions and is signalled by the warning lightor message (if present) on the instrument panel or every12 months.

Severe Duty All Models

In addition, if your vehicle is used under demandingconditions, including:

• On the track.

• On dusty roads.

• Short, repeated trips (less than 4-5 miles or 7-8 km) atsub-zero temperatures.

• Allowing the engine to idle for extended periods oftime.

• Driving for long distances at low speeds.

• Allowing the vehicle to sit for long periods of inac-tivity.

272 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Under any of the above circumstances, the followingchecks need to be performed more frequently thanindicated in the Maintenance Schedule:

• Check front and rear disc brake pad condition andwear.

• Check cleanliness of tailgate locks.

• Check cleanliness and lubrication of chassis andsteering linkage.

• Visually inspect condition of: engine, gearbox, trans-mission, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system -brakes) and rubber elements (gaiters - sleeves -bushes - etc.).

• Check battery charge and battery fluid level (electro-lyte).

• Visually inspect condition of the auxiliary drive belts.

• Check and, if necessary, change engine oil and re-place oil filter.

• Check and, if necessary, replace air cleaner filter.

Using the vehicle on a track should be regarded as anexception. The vehicle has been designed and manufac-tured for road use.

Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if thevehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment.This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.

If the vehicle is operated in a dusty or dirty environ-ment the engine air filter has to be changed every6,500 miles (10,000 km).

Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip/Periodic Checks

Every 600 miles (1,000 km) or before long trips, checkand, if necessary, top off the following:

• Check engine oil level.

• Check brake fluid level.

• Check windshield washer fluid level.

• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for un-usual wear or damage.

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir andbrake master cylinder reservoir, and add as needed

• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.

• Check screen wash/wipe system and positioning/wear of windshield.

Every 2,000 miles (3,000 km) check and, if necessary, topup: engine oil level.

8

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 273

Maintenance Chart

Required Maintenance Intervals

Refer to the maintenance schedules on the followingpage for the required maintenance intervals.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By OilChange Indicator System:

Change oil and filter.Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as

required.Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.

Check and adjust hand brake.Inspect exhaust system.

Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty oroff-road conditions.


Mileage or time passed(whichever comes first)

12,0

00

24,0

00

36,0

00

48,0

00

60,0

00

72,0

00

84,0

00

96,0

00

108,

000

120,

000

132,

000

144,

000

156,

000

Or Months: 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156Or Kilometers:

20,0

00

40,0

00

60,0

00

80,0

00

100,

000

120,

000

140,

000

160,

000

180,

000

200,

000

220,

000

240,

000

260,

000

Check battery charge sta-tus and possibly recharge # X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Check tire condition/wearand adjust pressure if re-quired

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Check lighting system op-eration (headlights, direc-tion indicators, hazardlights, passenger compart-ment lights, boot lights,instrument panel warninglights, etc.)


Check vehicle fasteners X X X X X X XCheck mechanical compo-nents fasteners X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Check windshield/washeroperation X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Check position/wear ofwindshield blade X X X X X X X X X X X X X

8



12,0

00

24,0

00

36,0

00

48,0

00

60,0

00

72,0

00

84,0

00

96,0

00

108,

000

120,

000

132,

000

144,

000

156,

000


20,0

00

40,0

00

60,0

00

80,0

00

100,

000

120,

000

140,

000

160,

000

180,

000

200,

000

220,

000

240,

000

260,

000

Check cleanliness of hoodand deck lid locks, as wellas cleanliness and lubrica-tion of associated linkages


Visually inspect conditionof: exterior bodywork, car-bon monocoque, aerody-namic bottom, pipes andhoses (exhaust, fuel sup-ply system, brakes), rub-ber elements (boots, drive-shaft boots, sleeves,bushes, etc.)


Check condition and wearof front brake pads anddiscs, and operation ofpad wear indicator




12,0

00

24,0

00

36,0

00

48,0

00

60,0

00

72,0

00

84,0

00

96,0

00

108,

000

120,

000

132,

000

144,

000

156,

000


20,0

00

40,0

00

60,0

00

80,0

00

100,

000

120,

000

140,

000

160,

000

180,

000

200,

000

220,

000

240,

000

260,

000

Check condition and wearof rear brake pads anddiscs, and operation ofpad wear indicator


Check and top off, if re-quired, fluid levels (enginecoolant, brake/hydraulicclutch fluid, windscreenwasher fluid, battery fluid,etc)


Visually inspect the condi-tion of accessory drivebelt(s)

X X X X

Check condition of timingbelt X X X

Check handbrake levertravel and adjust, if neces-sary (or every 12 months)


8



12,0

00

24,0

00

36,0

00

48,0

00

60,0

00

72,0

00

84,0

00

96,0

00

108,

000

120,

000

132,

000

144,

000

156,

000


20,0

00

40,0

00

60,0

00

80,0

00

100,

000

120,

000

140,

000

160,

000

180,

000

200,

000

220,

000

240,

000

260,

000

Check engine control sys-tem operation (via diag-nostic tool)


Check and, if necessary,top off oil level of twinclutch transmission

X X

Replace accessory drivebelt(s) X X

Replace spark plugs * X X X XReplace toothed timingdrive belt ** X X

Change engine oil and oilfilter ***Change brake fluid every24 months***** X X X X X X

Replace air filter car-tridge**** X X X X X X X X X X X X X

# Recommend using Midtronics tester to check chargestatus and, if necessary, recharge battery.


* The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,yearly intervals do not apply. The following are essen-tial to ensure correct operation and prevent seriousdamage to the engine:

• Only use spark plugs of the same make and typewhich are specially certified for such engines (refer to“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-taining Your Vehicle” for further information).

• Strictly comply with the spark plug replacementinterval given in the maintenance schedule for sparkplug replacement.

• Contact your Alfa Romeo Dealer if you have ques-tions.

** Regardless of the distance covered, the timing beltmust be changed every four years for particularlydemanding use (cold climates, city driving, long peri-ods of idling) or at least every five years.

*** The actual interval for changing the oil and replac-ing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usageconditions and is signalled by the warning light ormessage (if present) on the instrument panel or every12 months.

**** If the vehicle is operated in a dusty or dirtyenvironment the engine air filter has to be changedevery 6,500 miles (10,000 km).

***** DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every two yearsregardless of mileage.

WARNING!

• You can be badly injured working on or around amotor vehicle. Do only service work for whichyou have the knowledge and the right equipment.If you have any doubt about your ability toperform a service job, take your vehicle to acompetent mechanic.

• Failure to properly inspect and maintain yourvehicle could result in a component malfunctionand effect vehicle handling and performance.This could cause an accident.

8


IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS� SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE

FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282

▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . .282

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . .282

� IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . .282

▫ Alfa Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283

▫ Alfa Customer Center (Canada) . . . . . . . . . .283

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing OrSpeech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . .283

▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283

� WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . .284

� REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . .285

▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285

▫ In Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285

� PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . .286

9

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FORYOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to bringthe right papers with you, as well as your warrantyfolder. All work to be performed may not be covered bythe warranty. Discuss additional charges with the ser-vice manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’sservice history, as this can often provide a clue to thecurrent problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or thespecific work you want done. If you’ve had an accidentor work done that is not on your maintenance log, letthe service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must have yourvehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation withthe service advisor and list the items in order of priority.At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rentalvehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental,it is advisable to make these arrangements when youcall for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitallyinterested in your satisfaction. We want you to behappy with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to anauthorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, andare most concerned that you get prompt and highquality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealerhave the facilities, factory-trained technicians, specialtools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle isfixed correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to an authorizeddealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-solved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk tothe general manager or owner of the authorizeddealer. They want to know if you need assistance.

• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve theconcern, you may contact the manufacturer’s cus-tomer center.

282 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Any communication to the manufacturer’s customercenter should include the following information:

• Owner’s name and address

• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

• Authorized dealer name

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

Alfa Customer Center

P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone:1-844-Alfa-USA (1-844-253-2872)

Alfa Customer Center (Canada)

P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1-800-465-2001 (English) Phone: 1-800-387-9983 (French)

Customer Assistance For The Hearing OrSpeech Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, themanufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customercenter. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, whohas access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with themanufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that requireassistance can use the special needs relay service offeredby Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect witha Bell Relay Service operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicleto help protect you from the high cost of unexpectedrepairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle LimitedWarranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind onlythe manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased amanufacturer’s service contract, you will receive PlanProvisions and an Owner Identification Card in themail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. Ifyou have any questions about the service contract, call

9

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 283

the manufacturer’s Service Contract National CustomerHotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).

The manufacturer will not stand behind any servicecontract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract.It is not responsible for any service contract other thanthe manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased aservice contract that is not a manufacturer’s servicecontract, and you require service after the manufactur-er’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please referto the contract documents, and contact the person listedin those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investmentwhen you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealerhas also made a major investment in facilities, tools, andtraining to assure that you are absolutely delighted withthe ownership experience. You will be pleased withtheir sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues orrelated concerns.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the Stateof California to cause cancer and birth defects, orother reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluidscontained in vehicles and certain products of com-ponent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known tothe State of California to cause cancer and birthdefects, or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on theUSB card, for the terms and provisions of ALFA RO-MEO Automobiles warranties applicable to this vehicleand market.


REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect thatcould cause a crash or cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying FCA US LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problems between you, yourauthorized dealer or FCA US LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle SafetyHotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You canalso obtain other information about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect,you should contact the Customer Service Depart-ment immediately. Canadian customers who wish toreport a safety defect to the Canadian governmentshould contact Transport Canada, Motor VehicleDefect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.

9

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 285

http://www.safercar.gov/

http://www.safercar.gov/

http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either thewebsite or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-tercard, American Express, and Discover orders areaccepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, pleasecall for an order form.

NOTE: A street address is required when orderingmanuals (no P.O. Boxes).

Service Manuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the in-formation that students and professional techniciansneed in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLCvehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,system, and/or components is written in straightfor-ward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manu-als make it easy for students and technicians to find andfix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systemsand features. They show exactly how to find and correct

problems the first time, using step-by-step trouble-shooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostictests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

Owner’s Manuals

These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with theassistance of service and engineering specialists toacquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. In-cluded are starting, operating, emergency and mainte-nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilitiesand safety tips.

• Call toll free at:

• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)

• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)

Or

• Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

• www.techauthority.com


INDEX

10

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . .237Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . .44Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 103Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . .225Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . .227, 228Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12Alfa DNA System (Dynamic Car Control System). . .149Alfa Twin Clutch Transmission . . . . . . . . . . .144, 220

Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244, 269Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . .236, 267Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19Automatic Transaxle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .89

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105, 226Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105Keyless Key Fob Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158, 240

Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

288 INDEX

Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . .55Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255, 256Bulbs, Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 255

Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . .267Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267Caps, Filler

Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 194Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .221Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46Child Restraints

Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . .48

Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

CleaningWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267, 268Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236, 239Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238, 239Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . .236

Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 115Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282

Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222Deck Lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

10

INDEX 289

Deck Lid, Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . .19Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18Driving

Through Flowing, Rising, Or ShallowStanding Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . .89Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89Electric Remote Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .83Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . .102Emergency, In Case Of

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . .221Engine

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 194Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223, 267Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . .214Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Euro Twin Clutch Transmission

Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 194Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 233

290 INDEX

Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

FiltersAir Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

FlashersHazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 113

Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . .268Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200Fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267

Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250

Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191, 267Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130, 191General Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249

HazardDriving Through Flowing, Rising, Or ShallowStanding Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73Heated Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135Holder, Cup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

10

INDEX 291

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

Ignition Key Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14Immobilizer (Sentry Key). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105, 113

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250Interior Appearance Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . .81Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208

Key FobLock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .16Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 255Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 77

Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 103Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 115Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . .111Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78, 114Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . .106

292 INDEX

Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 113Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . .105, 113

Loading VehicleTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201

Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . .111, 221Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286Manual Transmission

Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 64

Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223, 267, 268

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224, 267Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

10

INDEX 293

Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . .4Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . .4, 286

Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55Placard, Tire And Loading Information. . . . . .169, 171Power

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31Pretensioners

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176Radio Frequency

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12, 17Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25Remote Keyless Entry

Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73Restraints, Child. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272Seat Belt

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . .32Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

294 INDEX

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25, 57

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25, 27, 29Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 72Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12Sentry Key (Immobilizer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283

Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 113Snow Chains (Tire Chains). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178, 179, 180Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268Speed Control

Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

SteeringColumn Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . .36

Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82Tilt Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

10

INDEX 295

Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . .169, 171Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 174, 178, 185

Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169, 174Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174, 178High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169, 171Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . .187Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165, 174Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178, 180Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

To Open Deck Lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197Towing Eyes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . .197Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197Transaxle

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243

Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . .5Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

296 INDEX

Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . .12Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254

Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4, 284Washer

Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245Water

Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81Windshield Wiper Blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

10

INDEX 297

INSTALLATION D’UNÉMETTEUR-RADIOLes systèmes électroniques se trouvant àbord du présent véhicule ont été conçusde façon à ne pas perturber les ondesradio. Les émetteurs-récepteurs radio etles téléphones mobiles doivent être instal-lés correctement par un personnel quali-fié. Respectez les consignes suivanteslors de l’installation.

Les raccords électriques devraient êtrebranchés directement à la batterie et êtremunis d’un fusible situé le plus près pos-sible de la batterie.

L’antenne d’un émetteur-récepteur radiodevrait être fixée sur le toit ou à l’arrière duvéhicule. Il faut faire attention lorsqu’onpose une antenne avec base aimantée,car le magnétisme risque de nuire à laprécision ou au fonctionnement de laboussole.

Le câble de l’antenne doit être aussi courtque possible et éloigné des fils électri-ques du véhicule. N’utilisez qu’un câblecoaxial blindé.

Ajustez soigneusement l’antenne et le câ-ble à la radio, afin d’assurer un faible tauxd’ondes stationnaires (SWR).

Un émetteur-récepteur radio plus puissantque la normale pourrait exiger des pré-cautions particulières.

Il faut faire vérifier toutes les installationspour s’assurer qu’il n’y a pas de parasitesentre l’équipement de télécommunicationet les systèmes électroniques du véhicule.

2 0 1 7

20

17

4C

SP

IDE

R

SPIDERSecond Edition Rev 1

Printed in U.S.A.

©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark ofFCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission.

17SPDR-126-AB OW N E R ’ S M A N U A L

Date post:	20-Aug-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	0 times
Download:	0 times

2017 Alfa Romeo 4C Spider Owner's Manual...Ce guide a été adapté à l’intention de nos clients...

Documents